JP6773988B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a slot machine has been known as one of the gaming machines (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-214434

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a game machine.

The present invention
In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the predetermined symbol combination can be stopped.
The predetermined game period, a first game condition, and a second game state capable of executing the predetermined effect when determining the predetermined result which does not execute the predetermined effect when determining the predetermined result, Can be set,
If a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, then the second gaming state can be set.
Wherein a predetermined game period, and the second a gaming state, when in the first predetermined number of executing the game by the first predetermined number in the execution possible situations a game in the second predetermined number, the predetermined game The first information about the end condition of the section can be updated,
Wherein a predetermined game period, and a second game state, when the even first prescribed number executes the game in the first prescribed number in viable situations a game in the second predetermined number, said first 2 The second information regarding the end condition of the game state can be updated.
Wherein a predetermined game period, and a second game state, when also executes the game in the second predetermined number in the execution possible situations a game in the second prescribed number in the first prescribed number, the predetermined The first information regarding the end condition of the game section of
Wherein a predetermined game period, and a second game state, when the even first prescribed number executes the game with the second predetermined number in viable situations a game in the second predetermined number, said first 2 It is characterized in that it is configured not to update the second information regarding the end condition of the game state.
In addition, the present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (in parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown). The invention according to the initial claim of the present application corresponds to the initial invention 10 among the initial inventions 1 to 14 described later.
The present invention (13th embodiment)
4 reels (31A-31D) and
It is equipped with four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels.
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons.
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is positioned vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button.
The embodiment may be characterized in that at least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

According to the present invention, the performance as a game machine can be improved.

In this embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of the slot machine which is an example of a game machine. In this embodiment, it is a front view explaining the state until the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot passes through the insertion sensor. In the first embodiment (A), it is a figure explaining the voltage drop at the time of power-off with a time chart. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of a medal in 1st Embodiment (B). In the first embodiment (B), it is a figure explaining on / off of a closing sensor with a time chart. It is a schematic diagram when a medal is ejected from a medal payout device in 1st Embodiment (C). In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram which shows the on (detection) / off (non-detection) state of the payout sensor when a medal is sent out from a medal payout device. In the first embodiment (C), it is a figure which shows on / off of a payout sensor by a time chart. In the second embodiment, it is an exploded perspective view which shows the outline of the main control board and a board case. In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a substrate case containing a main control substrate. (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 1 of the gate trace. (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 2 of the gate trace. In the third embodiment, it is a figure explaining the flow of processing when the disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub control board. In the fourth embodiment, it is a cross-sectional view (schematic diagram) explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, and (b) is when the detection sensor is turned from off to on. The state is shown, (c) shows the state where the stop button is pushed to the deepest part, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released and the detection sensor is turned from on to off. In the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the movement of the stop button and the excited state of the motor is shown in a time chart, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. In the fifth embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship between the on / off of a power source and a voltage level by a time chart, (a) shows the power-off after the main program is started, and (b) is before the main program is started. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state before the last ejected medal touches the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal payout device in which the last ejected medal is the fixed shaft and the movable shaft. It is a top view of the medal payout device which shows the state which the hopper disk has rotated more than (a) before coming into contact with a movable shaft. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is movable by being pushed by the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device which shows the state which the shaft has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejection unit, and (b) is after ejecting the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device which shows the state which the rotation of a hopper disk is stopped. 6 is a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor, the drive state of the hopper motor, and the discharge status of medals from the discharge unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation of the main control board, the driving state of a hopper motor, the detection state of a payout sensor, and the ejection timing of a medal in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of payout processing in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of payout processing in 6th Embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, it is a side sectional view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub control board. In the seventh embodiment, the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed is described (a). ) Indicates Example 1, and (b) indicates Example 2. In the seventh embodiment, the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed is described (c). ) Shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. In the eighth embodiment, it is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion (A portion of FIG. 22) of the slot machine in a state where the front door is closed, and is a diagram for explaining the gap between the cabinet and the front door. is there. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special roles (roles) and termination conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the specified number of each gaming state. (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used in common with non-RT and RT (non-AT) in a ninth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used in common in RB inside and inside BB in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED in the tenth embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board, (B) is a diagram showing a management information display LED, and (C) is a diagram showing a set value display LED. Is. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit 1a-5a and the digit 1b-5b, and the segments A-G and P in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the output port in 11th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal. Further, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. It is a figure which shows the address, the label name, the name, etc. of the data stored in the RWM. It is a figure explaining the concept of the difference counter value, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the difference counter value and an advantageous interval, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the program start processing (M_PRG_START) by a main control board. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an AT game count counter update process in step S281. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section transition lottery process in step S283. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition process in step S347 of FIG. 44. It is a flowchart which shows the AT lottery process in step S355 of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an AT initial game number determination process in step S363. It is a flowchart which shows the push order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning a prize in step S294. It is a flowchart which shows the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows Example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453. It is a flowchart which shows the sub difference number counter management process in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-difference number counter management process in 11th Embodiment, and is the flowchart which follows FIG. 56. In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the accessory condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the specified number for each RT, and (C) shows the number of winnings for each winning number. It is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view which show the outline of the structure including a reel and a stop switch in 13th Embodiment.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"Bet" means betting a medal (game medium) in order to play a game. To bet a medal, the actual medal is groomed and inserted from the medal slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet the credited (stored) medal.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as" storage ")" means that medals are stored inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above-mentioned "bet". In this specification, the term "credit" is used to mean not including "bet".
Further, "insertion" means betting or crediting a medal.
In addition, the "specified number" means the number of bets that can start (execute) the game in the game. For example, in a game in which the specified number is "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number "1".
For convenience of explanation, the "specified number" may be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "specified number". For example, in a game with a specified number of "2" or "3", when one medal is inserted (before the start of the game), the number of bets is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Maintenance" means that the player inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
The "care bet" means that the player bets a medal by caring for the medal from the medal slot 47.
The "care credit" means that the player credits the medal (adds credit) by caring for the medal from the medal slot 47.
"Bet medal" means a medal that has been bet.
"Reserved medal" means a medal that is credited (stored).

The "storage bet" is a bet for playing a part or all of the credited medals within the range where the player can bet in the game by operating the bet switch 40 (described later). To do.
The "automatic bet" means that when the replay wins, the number of medals bet in the previous game is automatically bet by the control process of the slot machine 10.
Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that it has stopped at the effective line; the same applies hereinafter) is referred to as "small winning combination". On the other hand, in the "Rules concerning certification of game machines and type verification (hereinafter, simply referred to as" rules ")", when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the condition device related to the replay is activated. It is interpreted that it is not a "winning prize". However, in the present application (the present specification, etc.), the replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying role), and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay may be referred to as "replay winning".
"Payment" means paying out bet medals and / or stored medals to the player. In the present embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" means paying out medals to a player based on a winning combination, or paying out medals by the above settlement. When paying out medals to players based on winning a role, store them as credits (adding stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in RWM53 (described later)) and paying out. Includes both paying out the actual medal by mouth (not shown). For example, "50" medals are credited as the limit number of medals, and medals for which the number of credits exceeds "50" are controlled to be actually paid out to the player.
In addition, "payout" may be referred to as "grant". Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants".

The "game medium" is a medal in the present embodiment, but in the case of, for example, an enclosed (ECO) game machine, electronic information (electronic medal, electronic data) is used as the game medium. In addition, "electronic information" means, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played by the game machine. It is possible to credit the game machine as a game medium for performing the above.
The "game medium" may be referred to as "game value".

Further, when the game medium is electronic information, "payout of medals" means crediting (adding) to the game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not mean only actually paying out medals from the hopper 35 (described later), but credits the electronic information of the dividend corresponding to the winning combination to the game medium credit device (payout of medals). The process of adding) is also included.

When the game progresses with "N-1" game, "N" game, "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When it is an eye, the game of the "N" game is referred to as "this time game". Further, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as a "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N + 1" game is referred to as the "next game".

In the present specification, a numerical value having "(B)" added to the end (particularly, 8 bits) of the numerical value means a binary number. Similarly, a number with "(H)" at the end of the number means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in binary and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is expressed as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the suffixes of "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted, respectively. ..

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for the target symbol to stop at the effective line).
Further, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means that the game has an advantage / disadvantage in the game result (combination of symbols that stop at the effective line) depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, and has or has a large number of payouts. An operation mode in which the symbol combination is stopped, an operation mode in which the symbol combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT is stopped, or an operation mode in which the symbol combination that does not shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT is stopped. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct answer operation mode and a correct answer push order.

The "game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" is, for example, a game in which any of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. Equivalent to the game won in). Further, although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which a plurality of types of replays are won (when a duplicate replay is won, a game in which a so-called "push order replay" is won), RT shifts depending on the type of replay won. This is also the case.

The "instruction function" means a function of instructing the player of the operation mode of the stop switch 42. The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
It should be noted that "display" is to show the content of the "instruction" so that it can be seen, and "notification" is to inform the player of the content of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. Then, the notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be referred to as "operation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be "instruction function operation". It may be "operation".
For example, if the push order bells shown in the winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. 58 (B), which will be described later, are in the 6-choice push order, the payout at the time of winning the push order bell is 10 or 10 in the example of FIG. Although it is one, it is assumed that instead of this, one, three, four, ten, or missed (non-winning) is obtained depending on the pushing order.
Here, notifying the pressing order for winning the 10-card combination is a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course, it corresponds to "operation of the instruction function".
On the other hand, notifying the push order for winning the 1-card combination, 3-card combination, or 4-card combination may be referred to as "notification of advantageous operation mode (operation of instruction function)", and "advantageous operation mode". It is not necessary to say "notification of".

Since the pushing order for winning the 4-card combination is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card combination, it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, since the payout number is "4" with respect to the bet number "3" and the difference number of the games is "+1", this is an operation mode for increasing the difference number, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the push order for winning the 3-card combination is not the push order for winning the 10-card combination, so it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, since the payout number is "3" with respect to the bet number "3" and the difference number is maintained as it is (the difference number is not reduced), it is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.

Furthermore, similarly, the push order for winning the 1-card combination is not the push order for winning the 10-card combination, and thus is not the most advantageous operation mode. Further, the payout number is "1" with respect to the bet number "3", which is an operation mode in which the difference number is reduced. However, since it can be said that the operation mode does not miss the role, it may not be a disadvantageous operation mode.

In the present embodiment, in the operation of the instruction function when the push order bell is won, the operation mode (correct answer push order) in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts wins is notified.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value (“2400 (D)”), but there is a margin in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later). Is considered to notify the push order for winning, for example, a 3-card combination or a 4-card combination as described above when the push order bell is won, and control the difference counter value so as to maintain the current status.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, suppose that the specified number for operating the instruction function is set to "3". In this case, in the game of the specified number "2" or "3" during AT, when the game is started with the bet number "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the number of bets "2", the instruction function cannot be operated even when the push order bell is won.

The "game section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section". In addition, Unit 5.9 had a "waiting section" (a game section that won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous section), but under the current rules of Unit 6, "waiting section" etc. Is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game section other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
The "normal section" refers to a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a push order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct push order) described later, and a peripheral board (for example, a sub control board 80). ) Is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to, and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not execute the processing related to the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of the winning combination, it is possible to decide whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.).

Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, it is not possible to display the push order instruction information on a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function cannot be activated. Since the signal related to the above is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub control board 80.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction is given on the main control board 60. It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub control board 80 cannot output an effect contrary to the instruction content given by the main control board 60 or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Further, the advantageous section may be a game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, or the instruction function may not be activated.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may be always activated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
The AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the AT is always in the advantageous section, and the AT is not executed in the non-advantageous section.

Further, in a game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the ball output rate in a predetermined period may be determined. It is also conceivable that the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not notified even in the game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, for the purpose of keeping the range within the range defined by the rules.
For example, if the upper limit of the difference counter is approached during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is temporarily not notified from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. (The instruction function is not activated) is also conceivable.

Further, various settings can be made for the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, first, it is possible to set "advantageous section = AT". In this case, winning the advantageous section and winning the AT are equivalent. Then, AT is started from the first game of the advantageous section. In addition, AT ends at the end of the advantageous section.

Secondly, it is possible to set "AT ≠ advantageous section".
In this case, the AT start (execution) condition is not satisfied only by shifting to the advantageous section, and on the condition that the AT is in the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the AT is decided by lottery or the like, and the AT is determined. When it is decided to execute the AT, the AT may be executed until a predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. When the player is non-AT when shifting to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to a normal section, a precursor, a CZ (chance zone (a period during which an AT is likely to be won)) or the like.

When shifting to the precursor after the shift to the advantageous section, the shift to the present precursor may be made so as to shift to the AT after the predetermined number of games of the present precursor is completed. Alternatively, at the time of transition to the advantageous section or after the transition to the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether to use this precursor or a false precursor, and when it is determined to be this precursor, the shift to AT may be made after the end of this precursor. .. In addition, when it is determined to be a sign of Gase, the advantageous section may be maintained or the section may shift to a normal section after the sign of Gase is completed.
Furthermore, when the end condition of AT is satisfied, both AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, although the AT ends, if the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, when the advantageous section is started, the number of games played in the advantageous section is determined, and the lottery or the like related to the advantageous section is not executed during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section is started, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section (lottery, etc.). Can be mentioned.
Further, when a predetermined end condition is set for the advantageous section and the predetermined end condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even if the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (or the number of remaining games in the AT) is satisfied, that time point It is possible to end the advantageous section with.

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous section means that the difference counter value described later exceeds "2400 (D)", or the advantageous section clear counter (number of games played in the advantageous section) described later is ". It can be mentioned that it has reached 1500 (D). When any of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the next game shifts to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED (also referred to as “section indicator”) 77, which will be described later, is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous section, but may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after shifting to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" includes, for example, a case where the instruction function is activated in a gaming state in which the section is in an advantageous section and the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". After the advantageous section display LED 77 is once turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

In addition, the "section Sim (simulation) ball output rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always displayed as a stop (even when the combination of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. Assuming that the combination is stopped and displayed), and when there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (the high bell that is the maximum payout when the push order bell is won) is This is the ball output rate when it is assumed that the game is stopped. In the calculation of the section Sim payout rate, the payout (number of payouts) due to the accessory operation (1BB operation, etc.) is not included. In the game that won the replay, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in the replay based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game that won the replay), the number of bets It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts of the game won in the replay and the number of bets of the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds" 1 "" includes an RT or a main game state in which the section Sim ball output rate is set to exceed "1".
Here, as an RT in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", for example, an RT in which the replay winning probability is set high can be mentioned.
Further, assuming that a CZ (chance zone), an AT, a pull-back section, or the like is usually provided as the main game state, an AT can be mentioned as the main game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1".

When ending the advantageous section, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous section, for example, when the game end check process described later or the game start set process in the next game of the final game of the advantageous section is performed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. To do. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section display LED flag described later.

Examples of the "processing related to the advantageous section" include the following processing.
1) Advantageous section (transition) lottery 2) Advantageous section clear counter update (subtraction, clear)
3) Update the difference counter (calculation, clear)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Further, the "process related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following process.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of game number management type AT (specification that AT ends when the number of remaining games reaches "0"), the AT game count counter is updated (subtraction, addition addition, clear)
4) In the case of the difference number management type AT (specification that AT ends when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), the AT difference number counter is updated (subtraction, addition addition, clear).

The current rules stipulate that the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed by one specified number in one gaming state (RT) except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specified number "3" enables the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function to be executed, and the specified number "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function. And said.
However, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to update the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, regardless of the specified number.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning combination lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number “0” in FIGS. 26 and 58 described later), in other words, in the game when the condition device is not activated, It is stipulated that the processing related to the advantageous section (advantageous section transition lottery) will not be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the winning combination lottery result is not won, the processing related to the advantageous section may be executed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the winning combination lottery result is non-winning, if the non-winning probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, "1/17500" or higher), the instruction function is involved. The process (AT lottery process) can be executed.

Furthermore, when the advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) is executed and the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the advantageous section will be set from the next game. Therefore, it is not possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery (process related to the advantageous section) and to notify the correct answer pressing order (process related to the instruction function) in the game in which the advantageous section is won.
However, it is permissible to perform the advantageous section transition lottery (process related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (process related to the instruction function) in one game. Further, for example, when a specific winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section and AT may be determined (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as “role ratio monitor” or “ratio display”) 74 is composed of four LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B) described later, and is a two-digit identification segment (5 below). It is composed of an LED that indicates which of the items it is by a predetermined symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) Or instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Character ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Character ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the bonus ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." Indicates the bonus ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative" refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been continuously counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted until at least "175,000" games are played. When the cumulative total is less than the number of "175000" games, the ratio is displayed by, for example, a blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the ratio is displayed by, for example, a lighting display. The cumulative total continues to be added until the value (upper limit value) that can be stored in the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is reached even after the number of games is "175000" or more.
Further, "6000 games" is the total number of games in which one set is "400" and the 15 sets are totaled.

The "advantageous section ratio" refers to the ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all the gaming sections (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section during that period is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "7".
It becomes "0%".
Further, the "instructed accessory ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the total of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In a slot machine not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction-included accessory ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated" is based on the fact that the stop switch 42 is operated according to the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, for example, in FIG. 58 described later, the winning number " When 10 bells of "3" to "8" are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.
On the other hand, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order, and therefore one bell in the example of FIG. "1" is added to.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order, the instruction-included accessory counter. Is not added to. In other words, it remains the count value from the previous game.

In the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same manner as when the push order bell is won, and the winning number display LED 78 is pressed. There are cases where the order instruction information (dummy) is displayed and cases where the instruction function is not activated. Then, when the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the payout number of the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts is added to the counter. In this case, the case where the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct answer pressing order by an image or a voice is also included.

The "continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts to the total number of payouts when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts".
For example, when the total number of payouts in the number of "6000" games is "2000", and the number of payouts when the "Type 1 Special Character (RB)" is activated is "500", the "continuous character" The ratio (6000 games) ”is“ 25 (%) ”.

Further, the "role of the accessory" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operation of the accessory to the total number of payouts. Here, the "accessory" is, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory, the second-class special accessory (CB) and MB (also referred to as 2BB. The second-class accessory continuous operation device. CB. Is continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) is included.
In the above five items, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "---" in the game machine that does not have the function corresponding to the item.
For example, if "RB (Type 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is set to "---. Is lit and displayed.
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. To do.

In addition, the rules stipulate that the ratio of advantageous sections and the ratio of designated accessories should be 70% or less. In addition, it is stated that the accessory ratio should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the continuous accessory ratio should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the rule range.

A game machine having a specification of an advantageous section ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a game machine having a specification of a designated accessory ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. In a game machine provided with an advantageous section, it is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section needs to be "70"% or less, but in the "7P" type, the total number of payouts paid out by the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is total. It may be 70% or less of the payout number, and for example, the entire period or most of the game sections may be advantageous sections.

For example, when shifting to a non-advantageous section, it is set to win the advantageous section lottery with a 100% probability, and it is set to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). That, or setting to win the advantageous section lottery with a high probability (for example, 70%) can be mentioned.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function by referring to the set value itself (for example, AT lottery), but the "7P" type performs processing related to the instruction function by referring to the set value itself. It is possible.
In the twelfth embodiment described later, most of the inside of the BB2 is in the advantageous section, and a lottery for whether or not to execute AT in the advantageous section is performed.

Further, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine as a performance display monitor.
The management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) in this case is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of the slot machine (rotary barrel type gaming machine). Then, the real-time (during measurement) base value for each "60,000" out balls (the "base value" indicates how many safe balls are for every 100 out balls) and "60,000". The base values of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd times before each piece are displayed in sequence. For example, the real-time base value identification segment is displayed as "bL.", The previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b1.", And the previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b2." Is displayed, and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
As described above, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko game machines among game machines.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 which is an example of a game machine in the present embodiment. The present embodiment comprises the first to fifth embodiments. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
As a typical control board provided in the slot machine 10, a main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (it does not mean that only those shown in FIG. 1 are provided). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected to each other via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as a motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC having a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs a calculation, and the like. Drive control and payout at the time of winning.

Further, on the main control board 50, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted. The RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
The MPU including the RWM83, ROM84, and subCPU85 is also mounted on the sub-control board 80 described later. The RWM83 and ROM84 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
The movement of the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in the medal selector will be described with reference to FIG. 2 and the like described later.
As shown in FIG. 1, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a throw-in sensor 44 (a pair of throw-in sensors 44a and 44b) are provided in the medal selector (but are not limited thereto). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are configured to be first detected by the passage sensor 46.

Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 from the payout slot. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 to the hopper 35 is formed. The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that closes an opening (opening leading to the medal return opening) formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector to form a medal passage for guiding the medal to the hopper 35 side. It is composed of an actuator and the like for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 is in a state of disallowing the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when all the reels 31 are stopped and the winning combination is won). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when the game is not performed.

In the medal selector, an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In the present embodiment, the throw-in sensor 44 includes a pair of throw-in sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and the other throw-in sensor 44b has passed a predetermined time after the medal is detected by one throw-in sensor 44a. It is configured to be detected by. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on / off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 has a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and an operation switch operated by the player. The checkout switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply," switch ")" switches the electric signal on / off based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receives an external force). It refers to a device (including an electric circuit and / or an electric component), and does not limit the shape of an operating body operated by a player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, the light from the light emitting element continues to be incident on the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect the light, the operation switch is in the off state). Then, when the operation switch (operation body) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light emitting element is not incident on the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electric signal indicating that the operation switch is turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, it turns on. You may.

In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 has a lever (rod) shape (hence, also referred to as a “start lever (switch) 41”), a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a settlement switch. The operating body of 43 is in the shape of a push button (for this reason, it is also referred to as “bet button (switch) 40”, “stop button (switch) 42”, and “payment button (switch) 43”). In the fourth embodiment described later, the operating body (the portion pushed by the player) of the stop switch 42 is referred to as a "stop button 42a".

Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided in the operating body of the operation switch and / or in the vicinity or the vicinity thereof. Then, when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the permitted state, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the disallowed state, for example, the operation switch of the operation switch By emitting red light from the LED or the like, the player is shown the permission / disapproval state of the operation switch.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switches 42 can be accepted, the LED of all the stop switches 42 is made to emit blue light so that the player can operate the reels 31. Shown in. Then, when one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is stopped and controlled. After that, the remaining stop switch 42 can be operated only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the stop-controlled reel 31 is terminated and the detection sensor 42e of the stop switch 42 is operated (the fourth described later). After the embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. Then, when the excited state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is terminated and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. The LED of the stop switch 42, which is still emitting red light but has not been operated yet, emits blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the game this time. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, specified number) medals are provided.
Not limited to this, a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

It should be noted that the specified number is predetermined, for example, according to when the accessory is not operating / when the accessory is operating. Specifically, it is set such that when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, 3 sheets are operated when 1BB is operated, 2 sheets are set when 2BB is operated, and so on. When the 1-bet switch 40a is operated twice, two medals can be inserted, and when it is operated three times, three medals can be inserted. When the specified number is 3, the 3-bet switch 40b can be operated to insert 3 medals at a time, and when the specified number is 2, the 3-bet switch 40b can be operated. Two medals can be inserted at one time. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated while less than the specified number has already been bet, the betting process is performed so that the number of bets is 3.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, the stop switch 42 is an operation switch provided by three corresponding reels 31 (left, middle, right) and operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when refunding (paying out) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected to each other. In No. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other separate boards (relay board, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquisition number display LED 78.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credit) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, a high-order digit and a low-order digit.

Further, the acquisition number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of acquisitions of the player) when the winning combination is won, and is composed of two digits, a high-order digit and a low-order digit, like the credit number display LED 76. ..
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may be displayed as "0".

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies an advantageous push order) in a game that notifies the push order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
Note that during AT, the advantageous push order notification is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 or the like of a symbol display device is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes a reel 31 for displaying a symbol (three in this embodiment), a motor 32 for driving each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a symbol combination corresponding to the combination) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected. Further, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, the number of pulses of the (stepping) motor 32 must be driven to stop the symbol ahead of the symbol on the effective line, counting from the symbol on the reference position. It becomes possible to identify whether or not it can be done.

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been maintained and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal slot 47 are formed so as to be housed in the hopper 35.
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance from each other. Then, when the medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 7, which will be described later) moves by the medal. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off by the movement of the predetermined moving member. It is determined whether or not the medals are correctly paid out based on whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off within a predetermined time range.

For example, when the hopper motor 36 is driven but the on of the pair of payout sensors 37 is not detected, it is determined that the medal has not been paid out, and a hopper error ()
No medal) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the on signal, it is detected that the medal jam has occurred.
The details of these operations will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8 described later.

When starting the game, the player inserts a pre-credited medal by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or takes care of the medal from the medal insertion slot 47 (maintenance bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet on the game, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) performs a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and drives and controls all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control to rotate. By rotating the reel 31 by the motor 32 in this way, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and the lottery result (internal lottery) of the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery). The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result) determined by the means.

Then, the game result of this game is displayed by the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops at the valid line (when the winning combination is won), the medal corresponding to the winning winning combination is paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The winning combination lottery means 61 draws (determines, selects) the winning number. Here, the "lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the wind business law rules (rules concerning certification of game machines and type verification, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"). The lottery result by the combination lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as an "internal lottery means 61" in terms of rules.
When the winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device that can be operated in the game is determined. In addition, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.

The combination lottery means 61 is based on, for example, a random number generating means (hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. It is equipped with a winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined region (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number that the counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec keeps counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and is a random number while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Keep counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random numbers generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with the lottery table described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. Then, when any of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). The winning combination may be a case where there is one winning combination (single winning) or a case where there are a plurality of winning combinations (duplicate winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number (the number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result (push order bell or push order replay winning) of the winning number by the combination lottery means 61 (the number corresponding to the correct push order). It is to make a decision).
The "pushing order" of the push order instruction number selected here means a push order (correct push order) that is advantageous to the player. For example, when the push order bell is won, it refers to the push order (correct push order) in which the higher bell is won. In addition, when a replay duplicate is won, it refers to a push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a push order that does not fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In the present embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
Then, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won during AT, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number on the above-mentioned acquisition number display LED 78, specifically, " Information such as "= *"("*" = 1, 2, ...) Is displayed. As described above, the function of displaying the push order instruction information when the condition device having an advantageous push order is operated is also referred to as an instruction function.
Further, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won during AT, the main control board 50 uses the sub control board 50 at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). A command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted to 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct answer pressing order on the image display device 23.

It should be noted that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. In the normal section, it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number.

The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
Here, the production group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Then, when the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the selected effect group. The number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is different from the push order instruction number described above, is selected for each game, and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub control board 80 receives the effect group number for each game, the effect can be output based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so that the sub control board 80 does not notify the correct answer push order based on the effect group number. .. On the other hand, during AT, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, the push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls to start the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when the rotation start command of the reels 31 is received, particularly when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in the present embodiment. ..
Further, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the current game after the winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. Is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is set. The drive is controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, the reel control means 65 enables a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is turned on) within the range of stop control of the reel 31 in a game in which at least one winning flag is on. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that it can be stopped on the line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning combination with the winning flag turned off) on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving symbols (frames)). Means within range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations in one minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for the predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) in which the MB is operating. Is set to. As a result, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB operation.

On the other hand, for the predetermined reel 31 in which the MB is operating, the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for the predetermined reel 31 in which the MB is operating, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. In addition, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop at the predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is stopped before the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, it is controlled so that the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is stopped at a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

On the contrary, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number stops at the effective line, when the reel 31 is stopped, the reel 31 By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, it is controlled so that the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number is not stopped on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of roles are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority of the winning combination is predetermined according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the pull-in stop control of the symbol related to the highest priority combination is performed according to a predetermined priority.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the reel 31 stopped on the effective line is a symbol combination corresponding to any combination when the reel 31 is stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination has stopped at the effective line. Specifically, from the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination in which the reel 31 stops at the effective line before actually stopping is previously set. It is determined, or the symbol combination stopped at the effective line after the reel 31 is stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output by the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a push order instruction number (only when a winning number having a correct push order is won during AT). , Production group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during a game and a game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally directed to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends the information (control command) required for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using an optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The following peripheral devices for effect such as the effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for production are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data or the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing various data and the like when a lottery related to the production is performed as the production data.

The effect lamp 21 is composed of, for example, an LED or the like, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined pattern. The effect lamp 21 is a back lamp and reel 31 that are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols that can be seen from the display window) from behind. Includes a fluorescent lamp that illuminates the design on the reel 31 from the top, a frame lamp that is arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the condition device operated in the game, etc.). It also displays game information (the number of games played, the number of acquired cards, etc. when the character is operating or during the advantageous section (AT)).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state in which the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic view seen from the front. In FIG. 2, the inside of the medal selector is shown so as to be visible. Further, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 according to their positions. The position of M1 indicates a state in which the medal M is placed in the medal storage portion 47b of the medal insertion slot 47 (a state before being released). That is, at the position of M1, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b are in contact with each other when viewed from the front.
In addition, in FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4 described later), it is assumed that the entire substantially square portion displayed as the input sensors 44a and 44b is the light receiving / emitting range (sensor eyes) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively (respectively). It is not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b).

Further, the position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M disappears when viewed from the front. That is, at the position of M2, the uppermost point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b overlap. For example, assuming that the player releases the medal M when the medal M is in the position of M1, the medal M falls from the position of M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, it is in a state of being released from the player's hand and falling (moving) to the downstream side.
The "upstream side" refers to the medal insertion slot 47 side, and the "downstream side" refers to the insertion sensor 44b side (hopper 35 side). Speaking of the position of the medal M, from the upstream side to the downstream side, M1 → M2 → M3 → M4.

In the example of FIG. 2, when the medal M is located at M2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M is detected by the passage sensor 46.
Further, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (on) when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. Further, the position of M4 indicates the position at the moment (off) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion for inserting the medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when the player bets or credits the medal M as a game medium. The medal insertion slot 47 includes a medal guard portion 47a and a medal storage portion 47b. The medal placing portion 47b allows a plurality of (up to about 10) stacked medals M to be placed at the same time, and has a substantially curved surface extending in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing (curvature slightly larger than the peripheral edge of the medal M). It has a curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a where the medal M contacts (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed so as to intersect substantially vertically.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the portion where the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a intersect has an opening through which one medal M can flow down. When two medals M are stacked, the medals M do not fall from the opening, but when the thickness of one medal M is thick, the medals M are formed so as to flow down from the opening. Therefore, for example, the player places a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal holder portion 47b, presses the plurality of medals M in the direction of the medal guard portion 47a, and strengthens the pressing force. By weakening the medals, the medals M placed on the medal holder 47b can be dropped one by one into the medal selector from the opening.

When the medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M flows down the passage in the medal selector. The passage sensor 46, the insertion sensor 44a, and the insertion sensor 44b are provided in the medal selector from the upstream side. Further, the blocker 45 described above is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the closing sensor 44a (lower side of the closing sensor 44a in FIG. 2).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining the presence or absence of medal clogging or goto action, and detects the medal M for a predetermined time (predetermined) from the time when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M. Further, when the medal M is no longer detected after the elapse of a predetermined time, it is determined that the medal M is normal. On the other hand, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a lapse of a predetermined time after detecting the medal, it is determined that the medal retention error occurs. Further, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M before the predetermined time elapses after detecting the medal M, it is determined that the medal M has passed illegally.

When the medal M flows down the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side in the medal passage. The blocker 45 forms a medal flow path so that the medal M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b when the blocker 45 is in the on state (among the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is on). In other words, it has the role of sending the medal M that has moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b side without sending it out of the medal passage.

On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the off state (of the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is off), the blocker 45 moves so as to be displaced in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing in FIG. To form an opening (pit) in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is off, the medal M falls from this opening and is sent out of the medal passage just before reaching M3 (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M that has fallen from this opening is returned to the medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the specified number of the game has already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, the blocker 45 is controlled to the off state because no more medals can be bet or credits. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in that state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return opening.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is closed by the blocker 45, so that the medal M flowing down in the medal passage passes over the blocker 45 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. It becomes possible to move to the side.

In the present embodiment, the blocker 45 is arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of the on / off state of the blocker 45, the medal M can be detected by the passage sensor 46, and when the blocker 45 is on, the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and When the blocker 45 is in the off state, the medal M may be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 may be located between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

Further, the passage sensor 46 may be located on the upstream side of the blocker 45, and is arranged at a position where the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is off. Just do it. Further, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M can be detected when the medal M is located at the M2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal M is further downstream than the position of the M2. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when moving to.

The throw-in sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medal M that has passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance from each other. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side can detect the medal M (turns from off to on). When the medal M further flows down, the insertion sensor 44b then detects the medal M (turns from off to on). By determining the on / off timing of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, it is not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medal M that has passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b is sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, the position of the medal M, that is, the position of the medal M from the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when the medal selector is viewed from the front, that is, the position of the moment when the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b. The time until reaching (the movement locus is shown by the dotted line in FIG. 2) is set to the time T2. It is a value when the medal M is located at M1 and the hand is released from the medal M (at the initial velocity "0") and released downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is located at M2 exceeds "0".

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal passage is bent from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with the impact member, the speed of the medal M is decelerated so as to move toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a) to the moment when it is located at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set to the time T3. ..

<First Embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows the voltage level when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is defined as the supply level V0. At the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which the power supply is cut off (the event that the power supply is cut off occurs) at the time S11. In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the voltage drops to the power failure detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when the power failure occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to the detection of the power failure (time S12; power failure detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms × 20). It is designed to have an interrupt (interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
A voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the main control board 50. Then, when the power supply voltage becomes the power failure detection level V1 or less, which is a predetermined value, a power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power supply is detected by detecting whether or not the signal is input. Detect a disconnection.

When the voltage further drops from the power failure detection level V1 and becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
In the example of FIG. 3, at time S13, the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, and then drops to Low. Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power off processing when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2, when the power off occurs at time S11, the power off processing can be completed by at least time S13. Is set to.

Further, the power cutoff is detected within the interrupt process executed every 2.235 ms, but when the power failure is detected for two consecutive interrupts, the power cutoff process is executed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, in FIG. 3, the time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is equal to or lower than the power cutoff detection level V1 by the interrupt processing twice in succession, and it is detected that the power cutoff has occurred. Then, in the next interrupt process, the power cutoff process is executed.
In the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power failure is detected, and when a power failure is detected, the process shifts to the power cut process (without shifting to the normal interrupt process). In the power off processing, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The process of turning off the output port 52 turns off the blocker 45. Further, stack pointer saving processing, power off processing flag (flag for determining whether or not normal power off has been performed) set processing, RWM53 checksum execution processing, RWM53 write-protection processing, etc. After executing sequentially, it becomes a reset waiting state (loop processing state). By design, this reset waiting state is a state in which no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the power cutoff process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off in the interrupt process next to the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power failure is detected.
It should be noted that the power cutoff process is not limited to the execution of the power cutoff process in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power failure is detected, and the power supply cutoff process may be executed in the interrupt process in which the power failure is detected. In this case, "T1 = S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals have been inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases the medal M while the medal M is in the position of M1. In this case, the medal M falls at the initial velocity "0". As a result, the medal M is released into the medal selector. Then, in FIG. 3, the time S11 when the power supply is cut off coincides with the time when the medal M reaches the position of M2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when the medal M is located at M4 is set to T2. Similarly, in FIG. Later, it is assumed that the medal M is located at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship of "T2>T1".

Therefore, if a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the closing sensor 44b does not detect the medal M. Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower plate) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M is swallowed, but after the power failure occurs (after the time S11), the medal M "1" addition ("1" addition to the bet or credit) processing is executed. Not done. This eliminates the possibility of betting or credit processing being executed after a power outage occurs.

For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the time T1
When the medal M is located immediately before the M4 in FIG. 2 (after the medal M has passed the position of the M3), the medal M is the insertion sensor 44a. However, the power is turned off without being detected by the closing sensor 44b.
Further, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 elapses (during the power off processing), the medal M is located upstream of the position of M3 in FIG. At that time, the power of the medal M is turned off without being detected by either the charging sensor 44a or the charging sensor 44b.

Further, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when it is located at M3 is defined as the time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship of "T2'>T1".
In the case of designing in the above relationship, if a power off occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the medal M reaches M3, the power off process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a, and is sent to the medal return port.

Here, the difference between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, when a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b when the power failure is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power failure occurred, the medal "1" addition process (bet process or credit process) was executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after the power is cut off. This is because after the power outage occurs, all processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped promptly.
Therefore, according to the first embodiment (A), even if the player inserts the medal M from the medal insertion slot 47 and the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2 (immediately after the insertion). Since the medal "1" addition process is not executed, the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<First Embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and the power failure.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing a process from the time when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the arrow direction indicates the traveling (flowing) direction of the medal M.
FIG. 4A shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the closing sensor 44a is the moment when the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off, and the closing sensor 44b remains off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4 (b), the insertion sensor 44a remains in the state of detecting the medal M, and the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M. Will be. Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the closing sensor 44a is on, and the closing sensor 44b is the moment when the closing sensor 44b is turned from off to on.
In FIG. 4, even when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines, but the medal M and the insertion sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged on the front side or the back side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 4 with respect to the medal M.

When the medal M further progresses and the state shown in FIG. 4C is reached, the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the input sensor 44 in this case
a is on, and the input sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 mm (so-called 25 pie (φ)) in the general specification and 30 mm (so-called 30 pie (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b so that the state shown in FIG. 4C can be obtained. Here, as will be described later, whether or not the state of FIG. 4C, that is, the time when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are on (detecting the medal M) is within a predetermined range. It is determined whether or not it is judged as a medal insertion error. Therefore, the distance between the closing sensors 44a and 44b also differs depending on how the time when both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are turned on is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 4C, the insertion sensor 44a does not detect the medal M as shown in FIG. 4D. In this case, the closing sensor 44a is the moment when it is turned from on to off, and the closing sensor 44b remains on. As the medal M further progresses, the insertion sensor 44b does not detect the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4 (e). Therefore, in this case, the closing sensor 44a remains off, and the closing sensor 44b is the moment when the closing sensor 44b is turned from on to off. The position of the medal M in FIG. 4 (e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing on / off of the input sensors 44a and 44b in a time chart. In FIG. 5, the time S21 is the moment when the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off (the closing sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing of FIG. 4A.
Next, the time at the moment (FIG. 4B) when the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns from off to on) is defined as S22. Furthermore, the time at the moment (FIG. 4 (d)) when the insertion sensor 44a does not detect the medal M (from on to off) is defined as S23. Further, the time at the moment (FIG. 4 (e)) when the insertion sensor 44b does not detect the medal M (from on to off) is defined as S24.

Here, if the time Ta (between time S21 and S23) during which the input sensor 44a detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 1), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, it determines that a medal passage error has occurred.

Further, the time Tb (between times S22 and S23) during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within the range of 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts). If (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, it determines that a medal passage error has occurred.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (between time S22 and S24) during which the input sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, a medal passing error occurs.
When all of the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, and when at least one condition is not satisfied, a medal passing error is considered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the closing monitoring counter is subtracted by "1".
Here, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects the medal M, and when the medal normally passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b (both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are off). → On → Off. Therefore, at time S24.), The counter is set to “-1”. That is, in the normal state, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 determines that the medal passage error occurs. To do.

Further, when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = "+1") and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. Then, when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error occurs. For example, when the normal value of the input monitoring counter is set to "0" to "2" and the input monitoring counter becomes "3" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error occurs. Be done.
The closing monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, when the insertion sensor 44b is turned from on to off, the insertion monitoring counter is subtracted by "1", and it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 inserts the medal. Perform processing (bet processing or credit processing). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, the "1" addition process of the number of bets is executed. Specifically, when the specified number in the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "0", the number of bets is changed from "0" by the "1" addition process of the number of bets. Update to "1".

Further, at that time, when the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number "50", the processing of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed. For example, when the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
When the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if the medal M is inserted, it is not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In FIG. 5, in addition to turning on / off the on / off sensors 44a and 44b, the timings when a power failure occurs and when a power failure is detected are displayed. In FIG. 5, Examples 1 and 2 are shown, and the case where the power is cut off occurs at the timing (time S21) when the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off is taken as an example.
Then, in Example 1, the power failure is detected after the time T1 elapses from the time S21 when the power failure occurs. Here, in Example 1, "T1>T3" is set. Therefore, when the power-on sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power-off occurs, the power-off process is started after the medal M "1" addition process has already been executed.

Here, the time T3 from the time S21 to S24 can be represented by "Ta + Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time of time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts and is "8.94 ms".
The maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
Then, in Example 1, the power cutoff process is always set to be executed after the time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of the power off (time S21) to the execution of the power off processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

With the above settings, even if the power is cut off at the moment (time S21) when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M, the power off processing is executed after the "1" addition processing of the medal M is executed. , The medal M is successfully bet or credited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal M from being swallowed.

Further, Example 2 is an example in which, contrary to Example 1, the power off processing is executed before the "1" addition processing of the medal M is executed. That is, in Example 2, the relationship is set so that “T1 <T3”.
As described above, the time T3 from the times S21 to S24 corresponds to 4 interrupts in the minimum time. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of "T1 <T3", it is necessary to execute the power off processing within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of the power off. However, since it is difficult to set the power off processing to be executed within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of the power off, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than 4 interrupts. For example, the minimum time of time Tc may be set to 15 interrupts. Then, if the time T1 from the occurrence of the power off (time S21) to the power off processing is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power off occurs at the time S21, the power off processing is executed before the time S24. It becomes possible.

When the power off processing is executed, the medal M "1" addition (bet or credit) processing is not executed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the closing sensor 44a detects the medal M at the time S21 (when the power is cut off), the “1” addition process of the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a demerit that the medal M is swallowed, but as described in the first embodiment (A), after the power is cut off, the medal M "1" addition process or the like is not executed. , The power cutoff process can be executed as soon as possible.

<First Embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and the power failure.
When adding medals to be paid out to credits, the storage area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated without driving the hopper motor 36. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so that the number corresponds to the number of credits stored in the storage area.

Then, when the medal is paid out after the number of credits reaches the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medal from the hopper 35 (discharge from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect on / off each time one medal is paid out. When the on / off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M is determined. Is not correctly paid out, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error occurs.

FIG. 6 is a plan view illustrating an operation when the medal M is paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disc (a substantially disk-shaped rotating disc) is attached to the bottom surface of the hopper 35, and the hopper disc is rotated by driving the hopper motor 36. A plurality of openings capable of holding medals M are formed in the hopper disc along the outer circumference of the hopper disc. Then, the medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disc. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disc rotates and the medals M held in the openings of the hopper disc are ejected one by one. The medal M is ejected, and a new medal M in the hopper 35 enters the empty opening.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 shows the medal immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disk. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are components constituting the medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medal M is paid out.
On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. In the no-load state, the movable shaft 38b is arranged at a position shown by a solid line in the figure, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7 described later). It is urged to the 38a side. Immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disc, the medal M (M1) is in contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In the state where the medal M is arranged at the position (M1) shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 and is in contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, the medal M is between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. Narrower than the diameter. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

In FIG. 6, a pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M discharged from the opening of the hopper disc. Then, when a pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the F1 direction, and the movable shaft 38b is pushed in the F2 direction in the drawing by the pushing force. The fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the drawing while maintaining the state of contact with the medal M. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b to a position where the medal M can pass. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

As a result, the medal M passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and is discharged in the F1 direction (medal payout port side) in the drawing. The medal M at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is ejected, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is returned to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 again by the force of the spring.

FIG. 7 is a plan view illustrating an on (detection) / off (non-detection) state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medal M is paid out in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) each time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position (initial position) indicated by the solid line in FIG. In the drawing, the movable piece 39a is rotatably attached around the central axis and is urged clockwise by the spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in the drawing, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is urged toward the fixed shaft 38a in the drawing.
In the state where the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise by the spring 39b in FIG. 7 and no force other than the tensile force of the spring 39b is applied to the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a has a predetermined stopper (shown). The clock is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7 (a).

As shown in FIG. 7A, a payout sensor 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the payout sensor 37a and 37b, and when stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7A, the tip portion thereof is detected by the payout sensor 37a. ing.
In FIG. 7, the payout sensors 37a and 37b both show the housing of the sensor, and the light emitting / receiving unit (eyes of the sensor) is not shown. In this respect, it differs from the input sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS. 2 and 4 in which only the light receiving / receiving unit (sensor eye) is shown.

Here, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is detected, and is in the off state (for example, FIG. 7B) when the movable piece 39a is no longer detected. It is set to be.
Similarly, the payout sensor 37b is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and is turned on (for example, FIG. 7C) when the movable piece 39a is detected. Is set to.
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in the off state.

As described with reference to FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M in FIG. 6, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. 6, but the movable shaft 38b is thus described. When it moves, in FIG. 7A, the movable piece 39a starts rotating counterclockwise against the urging force of the spring 39b. Then, when the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out from the inside of the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the payout sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, so that the payout sensor 37a is turned off. Further, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7B, the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the F2 direction and reaches the position of the alternate long and short dash line portion in FIG. 6 (the position where the medal M can pass through the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b), FIG. In 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise to reach the position shown in FIG. 7 (c). As a result, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7C, the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position of M2, the force for urging the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in FIG. 6 disappears, so that the movable shaft 38b is positioned at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. Return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. As a result, in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7D shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7D, the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.

Then, when the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip end portion of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the state (initial state) of FIG. 7A is restored. In the state of FIG. 7A, as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state. When returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the solid line position in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b in a time chart.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the ON state.
In FIG. 8, before the time S31, the state shown in FIG. 7A is shown. When the time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is off). Next, when the time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7 (c). In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

The payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is on until the time S33, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state at the time S33. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7 (d). In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is defined as Te. Then, when the time S34 is reached, the state returns to the state (initial position) of FIG. 7A, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

The main control board 50 monitors the on / off time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b in the payout process, and if it is not within the predetermined time range, determines that a medal payout error occurs.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, if the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, it is judged to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt. If not, a medal payout error will occur.

Further, the time Te in which the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state is set to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored, and when the time Te is not within the above predetermined time range, the time Te is monitored. , The main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Further, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) Or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored, and the time Tf is set. If it is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Further, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIGS. 3 and 5, the time from the occurrence of the power off to the power off processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off at the timing of time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example of detecting a power failure with 20 interrupts has been described, but in the example of FIG. 8 (first embodiment (C)), at least after the time S34 has elapsed (time from time S31). It is set to detect the power outage and execute the power outage process when T1 elapses.

Here, since the maximum time (normal time) of the time "Td + Tf" is the "12 + 27 = 39" interrupt, the time T1 from the power off to the execution of the power off processing is set to, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4 ms). Set. With this setting, even if the power off occurs at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power off process can be started after the payout process of one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td + Tf) <T1".

Conventionally, a power failure (power outage, etc.) may occur during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the timing of the medal payout process and the power failure, it is determined that the medal has been paid out even though the medal has not been paid out, which may cause a loss to the player.
On the other hand, in the first embodiment (C), even if the power is cut off during the medal payout process, the medals can be paid out correctly.

In particular, even if a power failure occurs at the timing of time S31 in FIG. 8 when the medal payout process is started, the power failure is detected after one medal payout process is completed, and the process shifts to the power cut process. Therefore, for example, the power off processing is not executed when the payout sensor 37a is in the off state or when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the power off process from being executed in the middle of the medal payout process and the medal payout process being interrupted before the (one) medal payout process is normally completed.

If the time T1 is set longer than necessary, the next medal payout process may be executed. Therefore, the power cutoff process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a changes from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, it is set to be “T1 <T4”.

<Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to a gate mark formed on a substrate case of the main control board 50.
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, etc. of the gate mark of the substrate case have been determined by the mold designer at the time of mold production exclusively for the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the gate mark is an uneven surface, for example, even if a hole is made aiming at the gate mark, it may not be visually discernible (not noticed).

Then, if the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is arranged directly under the gate mark, a hole is made in the gate mark and a wire is passed through the hole to access the main CPU 55 (goto action). Was done). In particular, when the gate mark has a shape that is thinner than the other parts, it becomes easier to make a hole than the other parts.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed by using the gate mark of the substrate case.

FIG. 9 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58) in an exploded manner.
The substrate case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded products made of transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be clearly visually confirmed from the outside of the board case 56.

On the main control board 50, electronic components such as the above-mentioned main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display"), and set value display LED 73 are mounted. It is installed. Many electronic components such as the above-mentioned RWM53 and ROM54 are mounted on the main control board 50, but the illustration is omitted in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 9, failure confirmation LEDs for the bet switches 40a and 40b, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are mounted on the main control board 50. Has been done. The failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is off when the start switch 41 is off, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects on). ), It is an LED that turns on (lights up).

The failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LED of other operation switches and sensors described later are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects on) and when it is off. It may be configured to light up.

Further, two failure confirmation LEDs for the bet switches 40a and 40b are provided, one for the bet switch 40a and the other for 40b, and are turned off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and the bet switch 40 is operated. It is an LED that lights up when it receives the electric signal at that time.
Furthermore, a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for the passage sensor 46 and the input sensors 44a and 44b are provided for each sensor, and are turned off when the medal is not detected, and turned on when the medal is detected. It is an LED.
Then, for example, the administrator operates the start switch 41 and confirms that the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is lit / extinguished, so that the start switch 41 has a failure (energization). Can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches and sensors.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED may be turned on / off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (setting is not being changed and setting is not being confirmed). .. Alternatively, the failure confirmation may be executed by opening the front door and executing a predetermined operation after a door open error occurs. Further, it may be turned on / off by operating the start switch 41 or the like at all times (even when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed).

Further, the model number of the board is displayed (printed or the like) on the main control board 50. Although not shown in FIG. 9, the model number and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and the ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed at the four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four corners inside the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw hole 50a and the boss 58c overlap each other, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case 58 by screwing the screw through the screw hole 50a to the boss 58c. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is overlapped with the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed in a shape in which the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown). Further, caulking portions 57a are provided on both the left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the drawing. Similarly, caulking portions 58a are provided on the left and right rows of the lower cover 58 in the drawing. In FIG. 9, the specific shapes and detailed shapes of the crimped portions 57a and 58b are not shown.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted and the caulking portions 57a and 58a are used for caulking, after that, at least a part of the caulking portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed (unless it is plastically deformed). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
As a result, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate marks 57b are provided at two places on the outer surface of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. In the board case 56 (the state where the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted), the side where the main control board 50 is housed is referred to as "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as "outside". ..
In FIG. 9, the gate marks 57b are provided at two places, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gate marks 57b may be provided at any place.

Here, the "gate" is a sprue when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is a mark that remains at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. is there.
When the substrate case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is inexpensive to use a mold that is divided in the vertical direction in FIG. Further, in the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of the fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide a gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed not on the side surface but on the upper surface in FIG.

Further, considering the cutting of the protrusion of the gate mark at the time of molding, it is preferable to provide the gate mark on the outside.
From the above, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
Further, for the same reason as described above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outside of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided at two places like the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57, but may be provided at one place, or may be provided at three or more places. May be good.

Further, when the resin (hot water) is flowed from the gate into the mold, if the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold is not uniform and a cooling time difference occurs, the molded product may be warped and deformed. Therefore, it is preferable that the gate position of the molded product is arranged at a position where the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold becomes uniform. Furthermore, when the gates are provided at a plurality of locations, it is preferable that the distance from the end of the molded product to the gate and the distance between the gates are as equal as possible.

In FIG. 10, FIG. 10A is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 of the board case 56 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 and the main control board 50. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together. It is a plan view seen from above. Further, the main control board 50 is seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. (A), and (c) shows Example 2 of the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Is shown. In these cross-sectional views, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, when the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, in the vertical direction (main control board 50 side) (directly below) of the upper cover 57 from the two gate marks 57b The model number display, management information display LED74, set value display LED73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are set not to be located. As described above, the RWM53, the ROM 54, and the failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, but it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above these.

The gate mark 57 is arranged as described above for the following reasons.
It is necessary to visually confirm whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with even after the slot machine 10 has been installed on the market. In particular, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the main CPU 55 or the like (including RWM53 and ROM54; the same applies hereinafter) is suitable, and whether or not it has been modified by a goto act. Further, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually confirm the main control board 50 from the outside of the board case 56. is there.
Then, the board case 56 containing the main control board 50 is attached inside the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, inside the back surface. This is because the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are installed at a position where they can be easily seen.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 visually observes the substrate case 56 (main control substrate 50) from the direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the substrate case 56 (main control substrate 50) is visually inspected as shown in FIG. 10A. For this reason, if the main CPU 55 or the like is arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark 57b, the gate mark 57 may hinder its visibility. In particular, the information displayed (printed, etc.) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like can be visually recognized without disturbing the visibility.

Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from transparent resin, visibility is not completely impaired even directly under the gate mark 57b. However, as shown in FIGS. 10B and 10C, the cross section of the gate mark 57b becomes an uneven surface, which reduces the visibility directly under the gate mark 57b (it becomes worse than the flat surface). That is true. Further, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10B, since the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, whitening or the like may occur due to stress at the time of cutting the resin. Therefore, even in this case, the visibility directly under the gate mark 57b is hindered.

Further, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a transparent and smooth surface without unevenness except for the gate mark 57b, even if a hole is made by a goto action, for example, it can be easily noticed visually.
On the other hand, the gate mark 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. Therefore, if a hole is made in the gate hole 57b and then the hole is sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to easily visually determine whether or not the hole has been made in the gate mark 57b. For this reason, there is a possibility that a goto act using the gate mark 57b will be performed.

On the other hand, when a hole is made in the gate mark 57b, if the main CPU 55 or the like is located in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark 57b, it becomes easy to perform a goto action. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 or the like is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 or the like, and it is possible to make the goto action difficult.

Further, since the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking the presence or absence of fraud, the model number is displayed in order to make the model number easy to confirm (easy to read). The gate mark 57b is not placed directly above the area. Further, when the gate mark 57b is directly above the model number display, a hole is made in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the board case 56, and the model number display is prevented from being tampered with. The gate mark 57b should not be placed directly above the model number display.

Further, with respect to the set value display LED 73, it is necessary to see the displayed numerical value when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Further, also for the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to look at the displayed numerical values in order to confirm whether or not the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are within an appropriate range. Therefore, the gate mark 57b is not arranged directly above these LEDs. Further, similarly to the above, in order to make a hole in the gate mark 57b by using the gate mark 57b and access the LED in the board case 56 from there, it is difficult for the goto action to be performed. The gate mark 57b is not placed on the top.

Further, with respect to the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates an operation switch to check whether or not the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch is lit, so that the visibility is improved. Therefore, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above the failure confirmation LED. Similar to the above, the failure confirmation LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark 57b to make it difficult for the goto action to be performed.

In FIG. 10, each cross-sectional view of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) has the same outer shape of the gate mark 57b. Then, in Example 1 of (b), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b remains a flat surface. On the other hand, in Example 2 of (c), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed in a protruding shape (thickness).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at the center thereof, and a recessed portion 57c formed so as to sink in a cylindrical shape at the outer peripheral portion thereof. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected at the time of molding, and when the molded product is separated from the mold, this boundary is cut with a cutter. Therefore, the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface by the cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: a method of automatically cutting at the time of injection by a molding machine, and a method of cutting at a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, it is costly to process the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, to make the height of the protrusion 57d almost "0". It becomes expensive and difficult. Therefore, the recessed portion 57c is formed so that the protrusion 57d does not protrude above the outer surface of the upper surface even if the protrusion 57d has some height left. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, an assembling worker from being injured by the protrusion 57d when the upper cover 57 is touched.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate mark 57, the wall thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced by that amount. As described above, if there is even a part having a thin wall thickness, there is a possibility that a hole is made in the recessed portion 57c to facilitate the goto action of accessing the inside of the substrate case 56.
Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 10C, a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inside) of the outer surface of the upper surface where the gate mark 57b is provided to prevent the wall thickness from becoming thin only at the recessed portion 57c. There is. If the protrusion 57e is not provided and the portion where the wall thickness is reduced is not provided, it is possible to make it difficult to make a hole in the recess 57c.

Further, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to countermeasures against fraud by preventing a part of the wall thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thin, but also functions as a dimple (hot water pool) at the time of molding. In FIG. 10 ((b)), when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) of the mold, when the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) of the resin (hot water) There is a risk that the flow will change rapidly and it will not be possible to flow stably. Therefore, by providing dimples (hot water pools) at positions facing the tip of the gate, it is possible to reduce the sudden change in the flow of the resin (hot water) when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate. (Hot water) can flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a quadrangular cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoidal cross section (in the case of FIG. 10C), and a dome cross section, and the protrusion 57e may be thinned by providing the recess 57c. Any shape may be used as long as it can prevent the above.

Regarding the visibility of the gate mark 57b in the vertical direction (directly below), it is better that the lower side of the gate mark 57 is smooth than the uneven shape. Therefore, the shape of FIG. 10 (b) is superior to the shape of FIG. 10 (c) in terms of visibility directly below the gate mark 57b. Further, the shape of FIG. 10B simplifies the shape of the mold because it is not necessary to form the portion corresponding to the protrusion 57e in the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. 10C. It can reduce the cost).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outside (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c shown in FIG. 10B are formed on the outside. This is because, as described above, it is more convenient in molding processing to provide the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c on the outside of the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pin positions of the main CPU 55 and the like of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be positioned in the vertical direction of the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. This is to make a hole in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 so that the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like cannot be accessed.
When the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 has the shape shown in FIG. 10 (c), the protrusion 57e in FIG. 10 (c) faces the pin side of the main control board 50, but the main It goes without saying that the pin protruding from the lower surface side of the control board 50 and the protrusion 57e are formed so as not to interfere (contact) with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 are heavy in the vertical direction. It is preferable to arrange (shift) so that they do not become. In particular, when the gate marks 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10B are used, the wall thickness of a part of the gate marks 57b and 58b (dented portion 57c) becomes thin, but the part where the wall thickness becomes thin is the upper cover. By arranging the 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions where they do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the easily targeted portions from overlapping.
Further, when the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of the other cover can be known only by looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 are prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). After that, it relates to the processing when the communication is restored or when the communication fails due to the influence of noise.
As described above, the control command transmission means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as a push order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub control board 80 outputs the effect based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the effect according to the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are disconnected and communication becomes impossible. The causes include poor contact and radio wave goto. When the sub control board 80 no longer receives a command from the main control board 50, the effect is stopped in the current state. Further, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 determines whether or not there is a disconnection in communication between the two. Therefore, the main control board 50 operates the game progress (bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42) even when a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80. Etc.), and the command transmission process is continued to the sub control board 80. On the other hand, when the sub control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 maintains the effect state at that time.
Even when the connection between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disconnected, for example, during AT, the main control board 50 is pushed to the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function. Display instruction information. As a result, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order by looking at the pressing order instruction information even when the sub control board 80 is not functioning normally.
Further, since the player can compare the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 with the effect content (correct answer push order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, both information are inconsistent. When this is done, it is possible to know that a problem has occurred in the image display by the sub control board 80.

For example, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game, the command transmitted from the main control board 50 can be received by the sub control board 80. Sometimes, suddenly, the production cannot be switched to the "N + 1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 indicates that the "N + 1" game has been started when the command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (command for notifying the start of the game) has not been received. This is because it cannot be determined. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the player may be misunderstood depending on the content of the effect.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the player is not misunderstood as much as possible, and the production is given a sense of discomfort. Output a production that does not exist.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 according to the third embodiment (referred to as “main operation” in FIG. 11) and the display of the effect by the sub control board 80 (referred to as “sub display” in FIG. 11). It is a figure which shows the relationship with (), and 5 example which consists of pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5) is illustrated.
In each of Patterns 1 to 5, communication is disabled in the middle of the "N" game (disconnection occurs), and communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game.
Further, in the main operation of FIG. 11, the “bet” means when the bet switch 40 is operated and a specified number is effectively bet. Further, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after the specified number has been bet. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped).

Further, in the sub-display, the "push order effect" means an effect of displaying the correct push order as an image in, for example, a game in which the push order bell or the push order replay is won. Specifically, for example, "right / left middle display" means an effect of notifying that the correct answer pressing order is "right / left middle". For example, "left middle display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, and the second stop switch is left and the third stop switch 42 is inside. It means a production to notify.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is an effect that the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 is operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated in the "N" game, the main control board 50 draws a winning combination as described above. In this game, "right, left, middle" is an example of winning the push order bell, which is the correct push order. In this case, if the main control board 50 is in AT, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct push order “right, left, middle” to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a push order effect for displaying the correct push order of "right, left, middle" to the image display device 23.
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information corresponding to the correct answer push order "right, left, middle" on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop by looking at the correct answer pressing order (right stop). As a result, the right reel 31 is stopped, and a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped), and displays the right / left middle display and the left middle display (note that other As the display of, "-middle left", "x middle left", etc. can be mentioned.).
Then, pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 is stopped, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 becomes impossible (sub disconnection). That is, it is an example in which communication becomes impossible during the game.

The main control board 50 can proceed with the game even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub control board 80 is not functioning). In the example of pattern 1, in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are operated (the left and middle reels 31 are stopped) after the disconnection occurs (left middle stop). ).

Next, it is assumed that the betting operation for the "N + 1" game is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N + 1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the "right, left, middle" is the correct push order, and the push order bell (or push order replay) is won. In the "N + 1" game, as in the "N" game, an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the right and left middle pressing order is shown, but when a winning combination having the correct answer pressing order in the right and left is won. The result of the lottery may be any combination.

When the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order is won in the "N + 1" game, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, even if the correct answer pressing order is not displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct answer pressing order by the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N + 1" game, the player shows an example in which the right stop switch 42 is first operated. After that, before operating the second left stop switch 42, it is assumed that the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored.
As a result, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 is updated as a continuation of the effect already displayed, that is, as an effect of the "N" game.

Therefore, in reality, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N + 1" game is operated, but the sub-control board 80 has the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N" game. Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct answer pressing order in the "N" game is on the left, in this example, the operation is performed in the correct answer pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (push order correct answer effect) and outputs the final middle display effect.

Then, in the "N + 1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, a middle stop effect.
Even if the winning combination has the correct answer pressing order in the "N + 1" game and the correct answer pressing order is other than right, left, and middle, the effect is output as described above under the situation of pattern 1. Will be done. That is, in the "N + 1" game, when the push order operated by the player is right or left, even if the push order corresponds to the incorrect push order, the push order failure as in pattern 2 described later No production is output.

Furthermore, in the "N + 1" game, if a winning combination that does not have a correct push order is won, or even if the winning combination is not won, if the pushing order operated by the player is in the middle right or left, the above The same effect as is output. That is, even when the "N + 1" game does not have the correct answer pressing order, the sub-control board 80 indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated after the communication was restored (in the example of pattern 1). When a command is received, the left stop effect (push order correct answer effect) is output, and the middle display is output.

Next, when a bet is made for the "N + 2" game and the "N + 2" game is started by operating the start switch 41, the main control board 50 causes the sub control board 80 to " "N + 2" Sends a command corresponding to the start of the game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect at the start of the "N + 2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands of the effect group number and the push order instruction number are transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving these commands, the sub-control board 80 performs a push order effect and a display of the correct push order as in the start of the "N" game.

From the above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N + 1" game, the sub control board 80 is based on the command (of the "N + 1" game) received from the main control board 50, and is the "N" game. The production of "N + 2" is continuously output, and when the "N + 2" game is started, the production is updated to the "N + 2" game.
Further, the main control board 50 may transmit a command for the number of acquired sheets to the sub control board 80 at the end of the game, and the sub control board 80 may also display an image of the acquired number of sheets during AT. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command of the acquired number of sheets at the end of the "N" game, that is, during the disconnection. Therefore, at the end of the "N" game, "N-1" The number of cards acquired at the end of the game remains displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and the command of the acquired number of sheets is received at the end of the "N + 1" game, the sub control board 80 updates the image display so as to be the acquired number of sheets at the end of the "N + 1" game. ..

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Further, the timing of disconnection is the same as that of pattern 1, but the timing of returning communication is different from that of pattern 2. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N + 1" game.
In the pattern 2, the main operation and the sub display in the "N" game are the same as those in the pattern 1, so the description thereof will be omitted.
Next, in the "N + 1" game, the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of right, left, and middle, but communication is restored after the second left stop.

Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect of the "N" game and the left middle display. In this state, communication is restored, and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) in the "N + 1" game, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command to stop in the middle while displaying the middle left, it determines that the order is incorrect and outputs a push order failure effect. In the third embodiment, after the push order failure effect is output, the subsequent push order effect and the like are not output.

In the "N + 1" game, assuming that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle left and right, the communication is restored after the middle left stop, and then the right stop command is sub-controlled by the right stop. When transmitted to the board 80, the push order failure effect is output in the same manner as described above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the process of outputting the right stop effect and the left middle display, if the right stop command is received at this point, it means that the same stop command is received twice in one game. .. Even in such a case, it is processed as a push order failure and the effect is output without performing error notification or the like.
Then, when the "N + 2" game is started as in the pattern 1, the command at the start of the "N + 2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 starts the production of the "N + 2" game.

In pattern 3, the main operation and sub-display of the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N + 1" game. Therefore, in the "N + 1" game, after the communication is restored, the command of the left stop, which is the third stop, is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left middle display" of the "N" game, if the command to stop left is received in this state, it is determined that the correct answer is pressed. Therefore, the sub control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (push order correct answer effect), and then outputs the middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N + 1" game ends at the third left stop. Next, when the command shifts to the "N + 2" game and the command at the start of the "N + 2" game is transmitted to the sub control board 80, the sub control board 80 receives the command and receives the "N + 2" game. Switch to the production at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and the middle display that have been output up to that point are cancelled. Further, even if the command at the start of the "N + 2" game is received during the output of the middle display, no error notification or the like is performed, and the effect at the start of the "N + 2" game is output according to the received command. ..

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games during AT in the sub display. Further, in the pattern 4, the main operation, the disconnection timing, and the communication return timing are the same as those in the pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games of AT to the sub control board 80 at each game and at the start of the game. When the sub control board 80 receives the command of the remaining number of games of AT from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 updates the display of the remaining number of games of AT. During AT, the display of the number of remaining games is not performed independently, but is output together with the push order effect of pattern 3.

In pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games during AT to the sub control board 80. Here, in the "N" game, it is assumed that the number of remaining AT games is 10 games.
The sub-control board 80 displays the number of remaining games (10 games remaining) during AT based on the command received from the main control board 50 at the start of the "N" game.
Then, if the wire is disconnected in the middle of the "N" game and the disconnection state continues even at the start of the "N + 1" game, the main control board 50 is subordinated at the start (start) of the "N + 1" game. Although the process for transmitting the command for the remaining number of games (9 games) during AT is executed to the control board 80, the sub control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to disconnection). Therefore, in the "N + 1" game, the "remaining 10 games" of the "N" game remains displayed.

Then, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game (after the left middle stop) and the game shifts to the "N + 2" game, the main control board 50 is transferred to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N + 2" game. On the other hand, the command of the remaining number of games (8 games) during AT is transmitted. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example in which the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication return timing are the same as in pattern 4, but the “N” game is the remaining one game of AT.
The main control board 50 transmits a command for the number of remaining games during AT (1 game remaining) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the “N” game (when the start switch 41 is operated). Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the remaining 1 game (from the display of the remaining 2 games up to that point).
When a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 has 0 remaining games during AT at the start of the "N + 1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). A command indicating that it is a game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N + 1" game, the display indicating that there is only one remaining AT game is continued.

Further, when the sub control board 80 ends the AT, the sub control board 80 outputs an AT end effect. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving a command (at the start of the game) that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, since the sub-control board 80 has not received the command that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 games, the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even at the end of the "N + 1" game, the effect of the remaining one game of AT is output.

Then, when the "N + 1" game ends and the game shifts to the "N + 2" game, at the start of the "N + 2" game, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80. Send. Based on the reception of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of "remaining 1 game" and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
At the end of AT, an image such as "Pachinko / Pachislot is a game machine that you can enjoy moderately" is displayed to prevent you from getting stuck. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N + 1" game, the image cannot be displayed. Therefore, as a countermeasure, the game history is managed on the sub control board 80 side, and when the game shifts to the next game (“N + 2” game in the example of FIG. 11) across the end of AT, the game is played. At the start of, the image is displayed.

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when a disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection in the "N" game until the communication is restored, and "N + 1". When the communication is restored in the middle of the game, the continuation of the effect output as the "N" game is output based on the command received in the "N + 1" game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when a command to stop left is received after communication is restored in the "N + 1" game, the correct answer is irrespective of whether or not the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct answer pressing order. The push order effect will be output.

On the other hand, in pattern 1, for example, in the "N + 1" game, if a command to stop in the middle is received after the communication is restored, the push order of the effect output at that time, that is, the "N" game. Since the wrong answer pressing order is applied to the left middle display, the pressing order failure effect is output regardless of whether or not the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct answer pressing order. However, even if the push order failure effect is output in the "N + 1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct push order of the "N + 1" game, the symbol is advantageous to the player. Since the combination is stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

As described above, when the communication is restored in the "N + 1" game, in the "N + 1" game, the effect that inherits the effect (of the "N" game) before the disconnection is output, and the effect of the "N + 2" game is output. Reset the effect at the start (return to the correct effect). As a result, it is possible to minimize the output of an unnatural effect in both the game in which the disconnection has occurred and the game in which the communication has been restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding as much as possible.

Further, in the example of FIG. 11, the example in which the communication is restored in the “N + 1” game after the disconnection occurs in the “N” game is shown, but the communication is restored when two or more games have passed after the disconnection occurred. However, it is the same as in FIG.
For example, when a disconnection occurs in the "N" game and communication is restored to the "N + a" game (a = "2" or more), the "N" game is disconnected up to the "N + a-1" game. The production just before and after is continuously output. Then, in the "N + a" game in which the communication is restored, the continuation of the production of the "N" game in which the output is continued is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N + a + 1" game, the effect (correct effect) at the start of the "N + a + 1" game is updated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
When the reel 31 is rotated and stopped, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited for a predetermined time (time T11 described later) (hereinafter, referred to as "four-phase excitation state").
A fourth embodiment relates to a time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. Note that FIG. 12 omits hatching from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings. Further, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has the structure as shown in FIG. In FIG. 12, the process from the pressing of the stop button 42a to the return to the original state is shown in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the side above the front door 12 is visible to the player.
Furthermore, the line on which the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d comes into contact with the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12A, the stop button 42a is an operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated (pushed inside the slot machine 10) when the player turns on the stop switch 42. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged so as to project from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When this part is viewed from the front of the player, it has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the no-load state, the stop button 42a is urged in the F3 direction (outward direction, player direction) in FIG. (A) by the spring force of the (compression) coil spring 42c, and the stop button 42a is urged by this urging force. The player-side end of 42a protrudes from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion (hereinafter, referred to as “flange-shaped portion”) of the stop button 42a is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the housing), and when the stop button 42a is pushed in, it comes into contact with the stop button 42a and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. Is.

In the drawing of the stop button 42a, a moving piece 42d that can move integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the lower surface side. Further, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) in the figure, when the stop button 42a is urged toward the front door 12 by the urging force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (lower end in the figure) of the moving piece 42d is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e has not detected the moving piece 42d and is in the off state.

Next, as shown in (b) in the drawing, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction when stopping the rotation of the reel 31. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing against the urging force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing, the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d comes into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. FIG. 12B shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned from the off state to the on state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is further pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 12B, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c as shown in FIG. 12C. This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pushed. Further, in the state of FIG. 12C, since the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state.

When the player releases the push of the stop button 42a from the state of FIG. 12 (c) (excluding the force in the F4 direction in FIG. 12 (c)), the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c causes the stop button 42a to be pressed. The force to return to the initial position acts. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a move upward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not come into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12 (d)).

FIG. 12D shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned from the on state to the off state. In the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state shown in FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-shaped portion front door 12 of the stop button 42a, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12A, which is a no-load state of the stop button 42a.
In general, the state of FIG. 12B showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state and the state of FIG. 12D showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state are shown. Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excited state of the motor 32 in a time chart in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13A shows Example 1 and FIG. 13B shows Example 2. Shown.
In FIG. 13A, the time at the moment when the stop button 42a is in the initial position (FIG. 12A) in the no-load state and the stop button 42a is started to be pushed is defined as S41. The time when the stop button 42a is pushed in and the detection sensor 42e is turned from off to on, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12B is reached is defined as S42. Further, the time when the stop button 42a is pushed in from that position and the stop button 42a reaches the deepest part (when the state shown in FIG. 12C is reached) is set to S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the pushing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes long, and if the stop button 42a is pushed early, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes short.

Next, at time S44, the push of the stop button 42a shall be released. At the time of time S44, it is assumed that the stop button 42a is located at the deepest part.
When the push of the stop button 42a is released, as described above, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to force the stop button 42a to return to the initial position. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not come into contact with the stop button 42a from the moment the push of the stop button 42a is released.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12D is reached is defined as S45. Here, the time from the time S44 to the time S45 is T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (moving distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is turned on (specifically, the detection sensor 42e is turned on) (in the state shown in FIG. 12B), the reel control means 65 uses the reel corresponding to the stop switch 42. The stop control of 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the winning combination lottery result (result determined by the internal drawing means) by the winning combination lottery means. As described above, the time from when the stop control of the reel 31 is started (after the detection sensor 42e is detected to be turned on) until the reel 31 is stopped is (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190 ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, the number of moving frames is 5 or less, and when the number of symbols is 20, the number of moving frames is 4 or less). Therefore, since it depends on the winning combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant.

Further, the reel control means 65 is in a state in which, after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position, the motor 32 is simultaneously excited (brake) in four phases for a predetermined time (the four-phase excitation state described above). ).
Here, the motor 32 in the present embodiment is a 4-phase stepping motor, and during the rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31), for example, 1.2-phase excitation is performed (note that the motor 32 is not limited to 1.2-phase excitation). Absent). Therefore, even during the rotation of the motor 32, there is one exciting state. Then, when the rotational drive of the motor 32 is stopped, a four-phase excitation state is set.
When performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when the reel 31 appears to vibrate at the stop position), for example, a three-phase excitation state should be set instead of the four-phase excitation state. Is also possible.

At the moment when the rotation drive of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a possibility that the motor 32 or the reel 31 may exceed the position to be stopped due to the inertia during rotation. Therefore, at the moment when the reel 31 is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor 32 is stopped. By setting it to a 4-phase excitation state and generating a static torque, it is prevented from moving due to inertia from the stop position. When the motor 32 is in the 4-phase excited state, the next operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, the operation acceptance of the next stop switch 42 is permitted when the detected sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state shown in FIG. 12D). ), And when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that has stopped the rotational drive is completed.

This control is for the following reasons.
In order to hold the stop position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to a 4-phase excited state, but when such control is performed, a larger load is applied than in the normal state, so that the load of the entire slot machine 10 is increased. It gets bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button 42a after finishing the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32.

In Example 1 of FIG. 13A, when the winning combination lottery result (result determined by the internal drawing means) by the winning combination lottery means is a predetermined result (for example, when the push order bell is won), the four-phase excitation state is established. The excitation time T12 from the start to the end is set to 90 interrupts (2.235 × 90 = 201.15 ms). Here, when the winning combination lottery result is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 in the 4-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupts" because the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of the winning combination lottery result. It means that it is not always.

Therefore, in Example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set so that "T11 <T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from the time S42, the reel 31 is stopped within 190 ms. As described above, when the number of moving frames during stop control when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21" is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20". Since the number of moving frames during stop control is within 4 frames (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within about "40" to "190" ms from the time S42.
On the other hand, the time from the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned from the off state to the time when the stop button 42e reaches the deepest part and the pushing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to S44) is , "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the push of the stop button 42a is released are close times (almost the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, it is assumed that the 4-phase excitation state is started at the timing (time S44) when the push of the stop button 42a is released, and after the detection sensor 42e is changed from the on state to the off state (time S45), It was designed so that the 4-phase excited state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is completed, the operation of the next stop button 42a can be set to be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the end of the 4-phase excitation state, it is possible to allow the operation acceptance of the next stop button 42a when the 4-phase excitation state is ended. .. This makes it possible to advance the game at high speed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13B, from the moment when the stop button 42a reaching the deepest part is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e is turned on to off (time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until it is reached) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is tripled as compared with Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the 4-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
Then, in Example 2, as in Example 1, it is assumed that the 4-phase excitation state is started from the moment (time S44) when the push of the stop button 42a reaching the deepest portion is released, and the 4-phase of the motor 32 is started. It was designed so that the detection sensor 42e was turned off after the excitation state was completed. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing so that the 4-phase excitation state ends when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the operation of the next stop button 42a is permitted when the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. This makes it possible to advance the game at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have control advantages.
In Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. 13, an example in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excited state is different is shown. However, for example, when the 4-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11 <T12" is set, the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the 4-phase excitation state is finished. Therefore, when the 4-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be digested at a higher speed in Example 1.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between turning on / off the power supply and starting the program.
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment in a time chart.
In FIG. 14, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing a state when a power failure occurs after the main program (program of the main control board 50) is started. The power supply shall be turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), power supply to both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is started, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level of the sub control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). In FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, the power failure detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as those in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

The time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 reach the supply level V0 after the power is turned on at the time S51 is defined as S52. After that, the subprogram by the sub control board 80 is started from the time S53 when the time T22 has elapsed from the time S52. After that, the main program by the main control board 50 is started from the time S54 when the time T23 (T23> T22) elapses from the time S52. In this way, the subprogram is started first, and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 sends the first command after the power is turned on to the sub control board 80. This is because the command can be received on the sub-control board 80 side.

Next, if a power failure (power switch 11 is turned off, a power failure, etc.) occurs at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level drops, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 can execute the power off processing as long as the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
When a power failure occurs at time S55, the voltage reaches the power failure detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupts) and the power failure is detected (time S56). Further, after the power cutoff is detected, the power cutoff process is executed, for example, after one interrupt, as in FIG. It is assumed that the power cutoff process ends at time S57.
After that, when the time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (process) cannot be executed. Therefore, control is performed so that the power off processing is completed before the time S58 is reached.

When the main program starts at time S54, it executes the setting of the main CPU 55, the check of RWM53, the confirmation of whether or not the previous power off was normal, the confirmation of the state of the setting key switch, etc., and then activates the interrupt processing. .. When the setting key switch is off, the power supply cutoff / recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of RWM53, etc.) is executed after the interrupt process is activated. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the setting change processing is started after the interrupt processing is started.
Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the power is cut off after the main program is started and the setting key switch is off, the power off processing is executed after the power off / returning process is completed. To do. As a result, the program can be terminated normally.
On the other hand, when the power is cut off after the main program is started and the setting key switch is on, the power off processing is executed without starting the setting change processing. This is because if the setting change process is executed after the power is cut off, a problem may occur.

Further, in order to execute the main program normally, even if a power failure is detected at the same time as the main program is started, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, even if the power is cut off after that, it is always executed until the interrupt is started. This is to detect a power failure in interrupt processing. As in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the "N" interrupt, a voltage drop (power cutoff detection level V1) determined to have caused a power failure is detected, and the next "N + 1" game However, when the voltage drop is detected, the power failure is detected at the "N + 1" interrupt (determined as the power failure). Then, the power cutoff process is executed from the "N + 2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program is activated at time S54, and the power is cut off at time S55 thereafter. However, even if the power supply is cut off at the same time as the time S54 (starting of the main program), the power supply cutoff process can be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14A, the time T21 from the power-on (time S51) to the voltage reaching the supply level V0 (time S52) is the time T21 from the occurrence of the power failure (time S55) to the low level. It is set to be shorter than T24.
Further, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 to the start of the main program) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14B is an example when the power is cut off before the main program is started by the main control board 50. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51 and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, the time S59 is earlier than the time S54 in FIG. 14 (a). That is, after the power supply (supply level V0) required for starting the main program is supplied, the power supply is cut off before the predetermined time (time T23) elapses (before the time S54 is reached), and the voltage drops. This is an example. In such a case, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply reaches the Low level.
In the example of FIG. 14B, when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 14, it is conceivable that the power supply is cut off immediately after the subprogram is started (after the time S53) and before the time S54 (before the main program is started). Be done.
When the power off occurs at the above timing, the subprogram executes the power off processing of the subprogram. Then, it is possible to end the power cutoff process of the subprogram before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, since the power off at the above timing is the power off before the main program is started, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the present embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 further improves the accuracy of the medal insertion determination and is also effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medal M moving in a substantially horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is falling substantially vertically downward, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b may detect the medal M.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but the blocker 45 is not limited to this. Any device may have a function of sending the medal M out of the medal passage before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a.
Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are shown so as to detect a position slightly above the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front. Does not mean. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any way as long as they are arranged so as to reliably detect the passing medal M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when it is located at M4, but is not limited to this. For example, the medal M may be at the position of M1 in FIG. 2, and the time from the moment when the hand is released until the medal M4 is reached may be set to T2 and “T2> T1” may be set. Alternatively, the time required for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be set to T2 and set to "T2> T1".

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process is executed until the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the closing sensor 44a due to the power off processing.
Alternatively, when a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process may be executed before the medal M reaches the closing sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the closing sensor 44a, but is not detected by the closing sensor 44b, and the power off processing is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, and the time T1 until the power cut is detected and the power cut process (blocker off) is executed. Is set shorter than the time from the position of the medal M to the position where the blocker 45 is installed (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2. Therefore, the medal can be prevented from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment when the hand is released at the position of M1 or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power cutoff process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power failure is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power off processing (blocker off) may be set to be executed after, for example, "2" to "5" interrupt processing, counting from the interrupt processing in which the power off is detected. Alternatively, the power off processing (blocker off) may be executed by the interrupt processing that detects the power off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, when a power failure occurs, the time T0 from the supply level V0 to the maintenance level V1 is set to 20 interrupts, but the voltage is limited to this. It is possible to make various settings depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is paid out by the medal payout device, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medal M itself to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged as in the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the (paid out) medal M.

Further, in the case where the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in this way, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Payout sensor 37a on, payout sensor 37b off (time S31')
Payout sensor 37a on, payout sensor 37b on (time S32')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b on (time S33')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b off (time S34')
Follow the course of.
Then, the time from the time S31'to the time S34'is set to be shorter than the time T1 (the time from the occurrence of the power off to the execution of the power off processing).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c are on the outside, but conversely, the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c are formed on the inside. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate mark 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. 10B, the outer surface of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 becomes a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape is shown in FIG. 10 (c), the protrusion 57e is formed on the outer side of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

(11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the substrate case 56, an example in which the main control substrate 50 is housed is given. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which fraud is to be prevented, for example, the board case of the sub control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub control board 80 also includes the RWM83, ROM54, subCPU85, and the like, but at least in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark on the upper surface of the upper cover of the board case of the sub control board 80. It is possible not to arrange the CPU 85, and further, not to arrange the RWM 83 and the ROM 54. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 should not overlap in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate trace.

(12) In the third embodiment, the push order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the number of remaining games during AT are given as examples. For example, during AT or special The third embodiment can be applied even when the number of acquired games (BB games, etc.) and the remaining number of acquired games are displayed.
For example, the number of cards acquired at the start of the "N" game is "200", the number of cards acquired at the start of the "N + 1" game is "209", and the number of cards acquired at the start of the "N + 2" game is "". It is assumed that there were 218 "sheets. Further, the main control board 50 shall transmit a command regarding the number of acquired sheets to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game.
Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the number of acquired sheets in the "N" game. Further, at the start of the "N + 1" game, the command regarding the number of acquired cards is not received (due to disconnection), so that the "N + 1" game also maintains the display of the number of acquired cards "200". Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of acquired cards at the start of the "N + 2" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the number of acquired cards "218" based on the command.

(13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is normally restored at the start of the “N + 2” game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be restored to normal after all the "N + 1" games are stopped or when a betting operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time of full stop or after full stop.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of the broken "N + 1" game, the number of cards that can be acquired during AT and the number of games may be added (added) to the lottery. In this case, since the "N + 1" game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, "
At the start of the "N + 2" game, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N + 2" game, the sub control board 80 adds the game information (acquirable). The number of sheets and the number of games) can be displayed.

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, when the wire is disconnected after the first right stop of the "N" game and the communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N + 1" game is operated. Can be considered. Then, in the "N + 1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the first right stop. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command in the "N + 1" game, it means that it has received the stop command of the stop switch 42 that has already been operated, so that the push order failure effect is produced. Output. Then, at the time of betting operation after all the stops of the "N + 1" game or at the start of the "N + 2" game, the image display may be returned to the normal one.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the acquired number of images is displayed as an image during AT, as the image display update process of the acquired number of sheets before and after the disconnection, for example, the following method can be mentioned.
When the payout process is performed, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of acquired sheets to the sub control board 80. Here, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, the sub control board 80 cannot receive the acquired number of "N" games. Immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game, it is assumed that the sub-control board 80 has displayed "100" as the number of acquired sheets during AT. In addition, 10 cards are acquired for both the "N" game and the "N + 1" game during AT.
In this case, the number of cards acquired during AT at the end of the "N" game should be "110", but it remains "100" (because the wire is broken). Then, it is assumed that the communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can return the acquired number of sheets during AT to a normal value based on the command of the acquired number of sheets received at the time of payout processing of the "N + 1" game. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of payout processing of the "N + 1" game, or may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N + 2" game as in the example of FIG. Further, it may be updated to "110" at the time of payout processing of the "N + 1" game, and may be updated to "120" at the start of the "N + 2" game.

(17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. In pachinko gaming machines, the starting port (the winning opening that starts the symbol variation by the symbol variation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the big hit lottery), the electric tulip winning opening (when the game ball wins, the next prize is awarded. For ease of use, there are various winning openings such as a winning opening that opens for a certain period of time and then closes. The electric chew is not limited to the tulip shape.), An attacker (a large winning opening that opens at the time of a big hit), etc. Provided. Then, it is possible to apply the first embodiment (B) to these winning openings.

Specifically, for example, a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has won a prize in the starting port) and an discharge sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after being detected by the winning sensor) are located at the starting port. It is provided. Further, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has won the attacker) and an emission sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). ..
For example, in the case of the start port, when a power cut occurs at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the discharge sensor is set so that the game ball can be detected before the power cut process is executed. As a result, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the game ball is detected by the prize sensor, the prize ball can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out even though the game ball has won the prize opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example as one of the game machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "rotary type game machine" installed in the No. 4 branch office to which the Fuei Law is applied. It is not limited to (so-called "pachislot game machine"), and can be applied to, for example, a casino machine and an enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) in which a medal used for a game is not used as a game medium.

Here, in the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine), for example, in FIG. 1, the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) can be eliminated. Further, the medal insertion slot 47 and the medal selector can be eliminated. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) given by winning the winning combination are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
Even in such a casino machine or an enclosed game machine (medalless game machine), the present invention can be applied to all of the above-described embodiment and the following embodiment except for the first embodiment.

<Sixth Embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to the control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
15 (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state before the last ejected medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 15 (b) shows the last ejected medal. FIG. 5 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is more advanced than that in (a) before coming into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

Furthermore, FIG. 16A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16B is a plan view of the final ejected medal. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the movable shaft 38b is pushed and moved.
Further, FIG. 17A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejection unit, and FIG. 17B is a hopper after ejecting the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 which shows the state which the rotation of a disk is stopped.

In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. Further, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 as in the first embodiment. Then, the main control board 50 controls the drive of the hopper motor 36.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, and the hopper disk 101 has a holding portion which is an opening capable of holding medals stored in the hopper. Eight 102s are provided along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in a circular hole shape penetrating from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101. The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed so as to enter into each holding portion 102 through the upper opening of each holding portion 102 and be held by each holding portion 102.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disc 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held by the holding units 102 move in a clockwise arc together with the hopper disk 101, and are sequentially discharged from the discharging unit 103.
When the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103, the holding portion 102 in which the medal is held becomes empty. Then, another medal stored in the hopper 35 newly enters the empty holding portion 102.

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes a fixed shaft 38a and a movable shaft 38b. Then, in the sixth embodiment, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is the discharging unit 103 from which the medal is discharged.
As shown in FIG. 16B, when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, the medal becomes the fixed shaft 38a. Passes between the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103.
Further, the moment when the medal passed between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returned to the original position (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal was ejected from the ejection unit 103. It's a moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medal has been ejected from the ejection unit 103.

Further, the medal that is last discharged from the discharge unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as the "last discharge medal", and the medal that is first discharged from the discharge unit 103 in the next payout process is referred to as the "first discharge medal". It is called a "discharge medal".
In FIGS. 15 to 17, the medals are indicated by a two-dot chain line. The medal with the letter "A" is the last ejected medal in one payout process, and the medal with the letter "B" is the first ejected medal in the next payout process.

Further, the position of the holding unit 102 in which the last ejected medal is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejected unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as a "first position", and one payout is performed. The position of the holding unit 102 in which the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejected unit 103 in the process is referred to as a “second position”.
FIG. 17A shows a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejected portion 103 (hopper disk 101, each holding portion 102, each medal with the letters “A” to “D”, and the fixed shaft 38a. , And the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). Then, in FIG. 17A, the position of the holding portion 102 in which the medal with the letter “A” is held is the first position, and the medal with the letter “B” is held. The position of the holding portion 102 is the second position.

Then, in the sixth embodiment, when the main control board 50 finishes one payout process, the holding unit 102 holding the first discharge medal in the next payout process is in the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped while the hopper disk 101 is located between the two.
FIG. 17B shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped after the last ejection medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103. In FIG. 17B, the first position and the second position are indicated by broken lines, respectively. Further, in FIG. 17B, the medal with the letter “B” is the first ejected medal in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17B, the hopper disk 101 is in a state where the holding portion 102 holding the medal with the letter "B" is located between the first position and the second position. The rotation of is stopped.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, the drive of the hopper motor 36 is suddenly stopped by passing a current in the direction opposite to that when the medal is ejected from the main control board 50 to the hopper motor 36, and the hopper disk 101 The rotation of the can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that fact.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejection unit 103, a current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting the medal is passed through the hopper motor 36 to rotate the hopper disk 101. When suddenly stopped, the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Further, by passing a current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting medals to the hopper motor 36, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction to rotate the hopper disk 101 in the reverse direction (rotate counterclockwise). ..
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, even if the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process passes through the second position, the hopper applies a current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting the medal. By flowing the electric current through the motor 36, the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction and returned to the second position.
Then, by returning the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal to the second position, the first ejected medal can be started to move from the same second position each time. As a result, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first ejected medal can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is passed through the DC motor as the hopper motor 36, the drive shaft gradually accelerates from the stopped rotation state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the discharge status of medals from the discharge unit 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18, the upper line shows the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the middle line shows the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the lower line shows the discharge status of medals from the discharge unit 103.

Further, the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port included in the main control board 50, and when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from off to on, a constant current is applied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from on to off, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, "stop" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and "constant speed" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 means that the rotation of the drive shaft is at a constant speed. Indicates the state where (constant speed) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is changed from off to on, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop" to "constant speed".
Further, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 rises diagonally to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates.

As described above, in the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates when the drive signal is changed from off to on.
Therefore, when the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates by the time the holding portion 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal ejection interval at the constant speed.
That is, when the holding unit 102 holding the first ejection medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving of the hopper motor 36 to the ejection of the first ejection medal from the ejection unit 103 is the hopper motor. It is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of 36 is rotating at a constant speed.
This may give the player the feeling that the ejection of the first (first) medal has been delayed.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the end of one payout process, the main control board 50 has a holding unit 102 that holds the first discharge medal in the next payout process between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the positioned state.
When the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position is shorter than when the holding portion 102 is stopped at the second position. .. As a result, the time required to reach the first position is also shorter than when stopped at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates, the first (first) medal It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the medals has been delayed.

Further, when the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, as shown in FIG. 17B, two adjacent holding portions 102 in the hopper disk 101 The portion corresponding to the space between the two is located in front of the discharge unit 103.
As a result, a fraudulent act such as a wire is inserted from the medal payout port provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12, and the fraudulent act (goto act) of trying to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101 with this fraudulent instrument is performed. Even if the hopper disk 101 is damaged, the corresponding portion between the two adjacent holding portions 102 on the hopper disk 101 serves as a barrier, and access to the holding portion 102 by an unauthorized device can be prevented.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held by the holding units 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharging unit 103 at equal intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from on to off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed", and then reaches "stop".
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is obliquely downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor, when the drive signal is turned from on to off, the rotation of the drive shaft is gradually decelerated.
Then, the last ejected medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, so that the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejected portion 103. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated, and the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejection medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from off to on, the main control board 50 subsequently transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 starts the process related to the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from on to off, the main control board 50 subsequently transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the process related to the output of the payout sound. As a result, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is completed.

Here, the “payout sound” means a sound output from the sub control board 80 side in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as "purururu" can be output from the speaker 22.
Further, the "process related to the output of the payout sound" is a series of processes such as a process of selecting a sound to be output, a process of selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and a process of outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. It means. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

Then, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80, and when the sub control board 80 receives the payout start command, the process relating to the output of the payout sound. By starting the above, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started by the time the first ejection medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80 when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, and the sub control board 80 processes the output of the payout sound when the payout end command is received. When the ejection of medals from the ejection unit 103 is stopped, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be terminated.
As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the payout of medals and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the ejection timing of medals from the ejection unit 103.
When a winning combination is won, the main control board 50 sets the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
For example, when a 10-card combination wins and 10 medals are paid out, "10" is set as the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM53.
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N ≧ 1), "N" is set as the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 "starts" (starts driving) from the "stopped" state, undergoes "acceleration", and reaches "constant speed".
At the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position, but the next payout process At the start of, the hopper motor 36 is set to reach "constant speed" by the time the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding unit 102 holding the first ejection medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches the "constant speed" by the time the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal reaches the first position. are doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 reaches "constant speed" from "stop" through "acceleration", the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal reaches the first position, whereby the first ejection is performed. The medals are surely ejected from the ejection unit 103.
Furthermore, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are off.
The timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37a is set so that the state in which the movable piece 39a is detected is turned off and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned on.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to be highly active as in the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37b is set so that the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned off, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is detected is turned on.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off at the timing (a) in FIG.
In the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active and the payout sensor 37b is set to be high active. Therefore, FIG. 8 in the first embodiment (C) is a signal of the payout sensor 37a. The waveform of is reversed on and off.

Further, at the timing (b) in FIG. 19, when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.
The state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing (c) in FIG. 19, the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is wider than the diameter of the medal, the payout sensor 37a is on, and the payout sensor 37b is also on. Become. At this time, the medal is ejected from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103).
The state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, at the timing (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is being urged by the spring 39b to return to the original position, the payout sensor 37a is on, and the payout sensor 37b is off. It becomes.
The state of (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b to return to the original position, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been ejected, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out the "N" medals, (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N" medals have been ejected.
Then, when it is determined that the "N" th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
Further, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 goes through "deceleration" and reaches "stop".
As a result, the process of paying out "N" medals is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout process according to the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, the payout number data is set. This process is a process of storing the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out "N" medals (N ≧ 1), "N" is stored as the payout number data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is pushed by the medal and moved) is turned on. It is set to be.

When "Yes" is set in step S103, the process proceeds to the next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, if "Yes" in step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, when the payout sensor 37a is turned from off to on, if the payout sensor 37b is already on, the result is “No” in step S104. In this case, it is conceivable that the ejection unit 103 is clogged with medals (medal clogging error). If a medal jam error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medal is removed (the error factor is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, remove the jammed medal and operate the reset switch to clear the error.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined time in step S103 (a predetermined time elapses while remaining "No"), an error occurs. In this case, it is conceivable that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). Further, when a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the error factor is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the medals are replenished in the hopper 35 and the reset switch is operated, the error is cleared.
In step S105, the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. On the other hand, when "No" is set in step S105, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is on. Then, when “Yes” is set in step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, when "No" in step S107, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104 or S105.

Proceeding to step S108, the main control board 50 in turn determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Then, when “Yes” is set in step S108, the process proceeds to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. If "Yes" is set in step S109, the process proceeds to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
If "Yes" in step S110, the process proceeds to the next step S111. On the other hand, when "No" is set in step S110, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104, S105 or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the payout number data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and storing the subtracted data as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout number data is “0”. Here, when “Yes” in step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is completed. On the other hand, when "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, the medals discharged from the discharge unit 103 are usually guided to the medal tray through a passage called a medal chute.
However, in rare cases, the medal ejected from the ejection unit 103 may hit the inner wall of the medal chute and bounce off, and return to the ejection unit 103. At this time, the bounced medal may hit the medal that is about to be ejected from the ejection unit 103, and may push back the medal that is about to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process of FIG. 20, on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is repeatedly determined in the order of “payout sensor 37a” → “payout sensor 37b”. To do.
As a result, it is possible to detect an error in which the medal that is about to be ejected from the ejection unit 103 is pushed back.

For example, suppose that one medal is about to be ejected, and when this medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, the payout sensor 37a is on, and the payout sensor 37b is off. (Timing of (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that the medal paid out in front of this medal bounces off and hits this medal, this medal is pushed back, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is obtained in step S105 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.
Further, for example, it is assumed that the medal is pushed back at the timing (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is obtained in step S107 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.

<Modified example of the sixth embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with eight holding portions 102, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight, and the size of the hopper disk 101 is, for example, five, six, or ten. It can be set as appropriate according to the situation.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hopper disk 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding portion 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as the medal can be held.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disc 101 during the medal payout process is clockwise, but the rotation direction is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disc 101 rotates counterclockwise and the holding portion 102. The medals held in the above may be sequentially ejected from the ejection unit 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, and may be, for example, the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21. Even in this flow of payout processing, the discharge of medals can be detected. However, in such a payout process flow, it is not possible to detect an error in which the medal that is about to be ejected is pushed back by the medal that bounces off the inner wall of the medal shoot.
Note that, in FIGS. 20 and 21, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
(6) The various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments and the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<7th Embodiment>
The present invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 mounted inside the cabinet 13 and the sub control board 80 mounted on the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 in a state where the front door 12 is closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 having an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
Further, the cabinet 13 is formed in a box shape in which the front side is opened by assembling the bottom plate 13a, the back plate 13b, the right side plate, the left side plate, the top plate and the like.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is arranged below the inside of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The medal payout device 15 is for paying out medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. I have.

Further, inside the cabinet 13, above the medal payout device 15, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided, and a symbol is provided on the reel base 110. The display device 14 is arranged.
Further, the symbol display device 14 includes a square frame-shaped reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged side by side inside the reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, motors 32 are connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by a reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel substrate case 121 is arranged on the reel frame 14a, and the reel control substrate 120 is housed in the reel substrate case 121. The reel control board 120 controls the drive of the three motors 32.

Further, a transparent main board case 56 is arranged above the symbol display device 14 inside the cabinet 13. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed at a position on the front side (inner surface side of the housing) of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14. The main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
Further, the main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 has a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a medal payout device 15, a reel control board 120, and a sub control board via an input port 51 or an output port 52. 80 etc. are electrically connected.

Further, the front door 12 is attached so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed. More specifically, the left side portion of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. Then, by rotating the front door 12 around this hinge, the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.

Further, a transparent display window is provided in the central portion of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Then, the player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, below the display window, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal insertion slot 47, and the like are arranged. ..

Furthermore, at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, a medal payout port, which is an opening through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15, pass, and medals paid out from the medal payout port are received. A medal tray is placed.
Further, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are arranged above the front side (player side) of the front door 12.

A transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged on the upper part of the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed at a position on the back surface side of the front door 12 (inner surface side of the housing), above the symbol display device 14, and corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is housed in the sub-board case 87.
Further, the sub control board 80 controls the effect, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Further, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, and the like are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Then, the sub control board 80 determines what kind of effect is to be output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and according to the determination, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the sub control board 80. The output of the image display device 23 is controlled.

As described above, the main board case 56 is arranged above the symbol display device 14 inside the cabinet 13, and the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
Further, a sub-board case 87 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 12 above the symbol display device 14, and the sub-control board 80 is housed in the sub-board case 87.
Then, as shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are arranged so as to face each other.
Further, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 when the front door 12 is closed is set wider than the width in the depth direction of the reel control board 120.

Here, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for storing electricity is arranged on the sub-control board 80. Further, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 bursts due to a defect, the filled electrolytic solution may scatter. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a defect, the scattered electrolytic solution is discharged. There is a possibility that the main CPU 55 may malfunction due to adhesion to the main CPU 55. Further, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 may be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the sub-control board 80.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and eventually the main CPU 55 is prevented from malfunctioning. be able to. Further, the main CPU 55 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
Further, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the main CPU 55 may malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86, but the sub By arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. Can be done.

FIG. 23A shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 1.
In FIG. 23A, the circle shown by the broken line is a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 onto the main control board 50.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction and main in the horizontal direction. It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
In this way, by arranging the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 at different positions in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are placed on the sub control board 80. The position of the electrolytic capacitor 86 can be a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be two, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (b).
FIG. 23B shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 2.

Also in FIG. 23 (b), similarly to FIG. 23 (a), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 is shown by a broken line.
In FIG. 23B, the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both arranged at different positions in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
As a result, also in Example 2 of FIG. 23 (b), the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are arranged at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be four, for example, as shown in FIG. 24 (c).
FIG. 24C shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 3.
The fact that the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is projected onto the main control board 50 and shown by a broken line circle is the same as in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b).

In FIG. 24C, the sub-control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Have been placed. Further, the remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the horizontal direction but in the vertical direction.
Even in such an arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24D shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 4.
The fact that the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected and shown by a broken line circle is the same as in FIGS. 23 (a), 23 (b) and 24 (c).

In FIG. 24 (d), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, as in FIG. 23 (a), but unlike FIG. 23 (a), the electrolytic capacitors on the sub-control board 80 are The 86 is arranged at a position away from the main control board 50.
In this way, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position away from the main control board 50, it is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Will be there.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a), 23 (b), 24 (c), and (d), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is placed at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. By arranging it at the position of, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and eventually the main CPU 55 malfunctions. You can prevent it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as a “role ratio monitor”) is arranged on the main control board 50. The management information display LED 74 displays management information such as an advantageous section ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, and an accessory ratio.
In addition, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section), and the "continuous accessory ratio" is the first with respect to the total number of medals won. It means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the special character (RB) is activated, and the "character ratio" means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the character is activated to the total number of medals acquired.

Then, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74. Good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and eventually the management displayed on the management information display LED 74. Information can be prevented from becoming unverifiable.
Further, the management information display LED 74 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
(5) The various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments and the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<8th Embodiment>
An eighth embodiment relates to a gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side sectional view of a lower front portion (part A in FIG. 22) of the slot machine 10 in a state where the front door 12 is closed, and the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 will be described. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 25, a first closing portion 13c is provided at the lower part of the cabinet 13 so as to project toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-shaped protruding portion that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the first closing portion 13c. However, the front door is in the 12 direction.
Further, the first closing portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed of sheet metal and is fixed to the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 by screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position below the first closing portion 13c in the lower part of the front door 12, the second closing portion 12a projecting toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-shaped protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the second closing portion 12a is. The cabinet has 13 directions.

Further, the second closed portion 12a is arranged at a position below the first closed portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed in a horizontally long shape from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12.
Further, the second closing portion 12a is also formed of sheet metal like the first closing portion 13c, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 by screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position above the first closing portion 13c in the lower part of the front door 12, a third closing portion 12b projecting toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, the third closing portion 12b is a plate-shaped protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 like the second closing portion 12a, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing portion 12b is the third. 3 The protruding direction of the closing portion 12b is the direction of the cabinet 13.

Further, the third closing portion 12b is formed in a horizontally long shape from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12, similarly to the second closing portion 12a.
Furthermore, unlike the second closed portion 12a, the third closed portion 12b is arranged at a position above the first closed portion 13c.
Further, the third closing portion 12b is also formed of sheet metal like the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 by screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closed portion 13c is arranged between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b.
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing is bent as if the left and right sides of the "U" shape are inverted, as shown in FIG. The shape is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (goto acts) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 inside the cabinet.

Further, a door sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. This door sensor is configured by using an optical sensor having a light emitting / receiving unit, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Furthermore, on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, a detection piece that can be moved in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is urged by a spring to pop out forward.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in the state of detecting the detection piece and is in the off state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece pops out forward by being urged by the spring and goes out from the inside of the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state of not detecting the detection piece and is turned on.

Then, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in the closed state when the door sensor is in the off state, and determines that the front door 12 is in the open state when the door sensor is in the on state.
In this way, the detection piece moves in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12, and the door sensor is turned on / off to detect the opening and closing of the front door 12.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed state, goes out from the state where it has entered the door sensor, and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a "detection start position".
Further, when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12, it means the moment when the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.

Then, in the eighth embodiment, not only in the state where the front door 12 is closed, but also in the state where the front door 12 is in the detection start position, the first closed portion is between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b. It is formed so that 13c is arranged.
That is, even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor is turned from the off state to the on state, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. It is formed like this.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first changes from the off state to the on state, and then the first closed portion 13c comes out from between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b. It will be.
Then, when the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in the open state, transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 sends a door opening command. Is received, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 and the like notify that the front door 12 is open. As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, the first closed portion 13c does not come out from between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b, and the front door 12 opens. Even at the position where the notification of the fact is started, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 has a bent shape, so that a wire is inserted into the housing through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (door acts) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing it through.

In the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejection medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, so that the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the two adjacent holding portions 102 in the hopper disk 101. The corresponding portion can be positioned in front of the ejection portion 103, thereby preventing fraudulent acts of inserting a wire or the like from the medal payout port to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101. As described above, by providing the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15.

Here, the distance between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a is set to "h1", the distance between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b is set to "h2", and the distance between the second closed portion 12a and the second closed portion 12a is defined as "h2". 3 The distance from the closed portion 12b is "h3", and the protruding width (depth) of the second closed portion 12a is "w".
Further, the diameter of the medal is "d" and the thickness of the medal is "t".
The size of a general medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
Then, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b and the thickness "t" of the medal is set to satisfy "h2>t". ing.

Here, when the clerk in the hall opens the front door 12 and replenishes the hopper 35 with medals, the medals may be dropped on the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
In particular, in order to replenish the hopper 35 with medals from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, there is a case where the medals are dropped near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c.

At this time, if it is set to satisfy "h2>t", even if the front door 12 is closed while the medals have fallen near the first closed portion 13c, the medals that have fallen near the first closed portion 13c will remain. , It enters between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b. As a result, the front door 1
The front door 12 can be closed without damaging the 2 or the cabinet 13. Further, the medal is not caught between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b, and the front door 12 does not close.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protruding width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal “d” is set so as to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”. Has been done.
By setting so as to satisfy "w <(d / 2)", it is possible to prevent the medal from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed with the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a, and by extension, the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a causes the front door to be closed. It is possible to prevent the 12 and the cabinet 13 from being damaged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured by using an optical sensor having a light emitting / receiving unit, but the door sensor is not limited to this, and may be configured by using, for example, a proximity sensor.
Further, even when the door sensor is configured by using the proximity sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is in the detection start position. The first closed portion 13c is arranged between the two.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece that can be moved in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is urged by the spring and pops out forward. I tried to get out of the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor on the front door 12. Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 goes out from the inside of the door sensor. You may do it.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the door sensor may be provided on the front door 12 side.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is turned off when the detection piece is being detected, and is turned on when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be turned on when the detection piece is being detected and turned off when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor may be set to be highly active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in the closed state when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is in the open state when the door sensor is in the off state. It is configured as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closed portion 13c is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Further, the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b are formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closing portion 13c may be composed of two members, a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a, and may be divided into three parts. It may be composed of the three members.
The second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b may also be composed of two members or three members in the same manner as the first closed portion 13c.
As described above, the first closed portion 13c, the second closed portion 12a, and the third closed portion 12b are not limited to being composed of one member, and may be composed of a plurality of members.

Further, the first closed portion 13c does not reach from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and for example, the first closed portion 13c is provided near the right end or the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. It may have a part that is not present.
Similarly, the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 may have a part where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
As described above, even if a part of the first closed portion 13c, the second closed portion 12a, and the third closed portion 12b is not provided, the inside of the housing is formed through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like through a wire or the like.
Further, the first closing portion 13c may be a part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be a part of the front door 12, or may be a separate member from the front door 12.

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closed portion 13c is arranged between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a, or the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b, or the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Further, the entire first closed portion 13c may be arranged between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b, and a part of the first closed portion 13c may be arranged. May be good.

Furthermore, with the front door 12 closed, the first closing portion 13c may be brought into contact with the position corresponding to the space between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b on the back surface of the front door 12. ..
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing portion 13c that protrudes from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13 is provided, and the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 is directed toward the front door 12 from a position below the first closing portion 13c. A second closing portion 12a that protrudes may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b that protrudes toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 may be provided.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b and the medal thickness "t" is set to satisfy "h2>t". ..
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be set so as to satisfy "h2 <t".
When set to satisfy "h2>t", when the front door 12 is closed with the medals dropped near the first closed portion 13c, the medals dropped near the first closed portion 13c are the third closed portion. It hits the rear end of 12b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. As a result, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. Further, the medal is not caught between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b, and the front door 12 does not close.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal are set so as to satisfy "w <(d / 2)" with respect to the relationship with "d". did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be set to satisfy "(d / 2) <w <d".
By satisfying "(d / 2) <w", the medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "w <d", even if the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a, the front door 12 is placed on the second closed portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medal is placed on the second closed portion 12a, and by extension, the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a is given to the hall clerk. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(9) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second closed portion 12a and the diameter of the medal is "d", and the distance "h1" between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a and the medal. Regarding the relationship with the thickness "t", it may be set so as to satisfy "(d / 2) <w" and "h1 <t".
As described above, by satisfying "(d / 2) <w", the medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1 <t", even if the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a, the front door 12 is placed on the second closed portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the first closing portion 13c, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medal is placed on the second closed portion 12a, and by extension, the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a is given to the hall clerk. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(10) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) “w” of the second closed portion 12a and the diameter of the medal “d”, and the distance “h1” between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a and the medal. Regarding the relationship with the thickness "t", it may be set so as to satisfy "d <w" and "h1>t".
By satisfying "d <w", the entire medal can be placed on the second closed portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closed portion 12a without a part of the medal protruding from the second closed portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1>t", a medal can be inserted between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a, the front door 12 is closed with the medal fitted between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a. It will be. As a result, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. Further, the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a does not hit the first closing portion 13c or the front end portion of the cabinet 13, and the front door 12 does not close.
(11) The various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments and the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<9th embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to the stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side and the control of the output of the effect on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26 (a) is a diagram showing the types of special roles (roles) and end conditions, and FIG. 26 (b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the specified number of each gaming state. (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1.

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the ninth embodiment, as special roles (roles), BB (first-class bonus continuous operation device; first-class big bonus) and RB (first-class special bonus) (Regular bonus) and MB (Type 2 accessory continuous operation device; Type 2 big bonus).
Here, the BB is a device capable of continuously operating the RB. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is continuously executed. Also, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small role is high. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Further, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

In addition, the MB is a device capable of continuously operating the CB (Type 2 special accessory). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61, all the small winning combinations are in a state of being duplicated, and the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment when the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is one). Further, the CB game ends in one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, in the ninth embodiment, seven game states are provided: non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. There is. Then, the main control board 50 controls the transition of these gaming states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of medals inserted in which the start switch 41 can be operated (the game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the specified number in the MB is set to "1", and the specified number in the gaming state other than in the MB is set to "3".

Further, "RT" means that the type (number) of the condition devices (features, replays, small wins) to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are in a unique lottery state.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but means that the type of conditional device to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are different from RT.
In any of the game states, if the start condition of RT is satisfied, the game shifts to RT from the next game, and if the end condition of RT is satisfied in RT, the game shifts to non-RT from the next game.

In addition, when a special role is won, the winning information of the special role is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role stops at the valid line.
A game that has not been won as a special role is called "non-internal", and when the special role is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role is not stopped at the valid line, that is, the special role is won. A game that carries over information is called "inside".

Further, from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped (maximum number of moving frames), the probability that the desired symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effective line can be stopped on the effective line is "pulled in". It is called "rate (PB)".
Then, if the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate reel 31 position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped at the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped at the effective line (effective). The inability to pull in to the line) is called "PB ≠ 1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. It is referred to as "PB = 1".

If the BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops at the valid line (BB wins), the BB game will start from the next game, although no medals will be paid out in this game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination is increased because the RB game is continuously executed. Then, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends, and the game returns to the game state before the transition to the BB game from the next game.
Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop at the effective line, the winning information of the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops at the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of BB is carried over is called "inside BB".
The timing of transition to the inside of the BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game in which the BB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the game may be transferred to the inside of the BB, and in the game in which the BB is won, the game is not transferred to the inside of the BB and is inside the BB in the next game. It may be moved inside.

If the RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops at the effective line (RB wins), no medal will be paid out in this game, but the RB game will start from the next game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small role is high. Then, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends, and the game returns to the game state before the transition to the RB game from the next game.
Furthermore, if the RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop at the effective line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops at the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of the RB is carried over is called "inside the RB".
The transition timing to the inside of the RB can be appropriately set in the same manner as the transition timing to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the game may be transferred to the inside of the RB. You may move to the inside.

In addition, if the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops at the valid line (MB wins), the MB game will start from the next game, although no medals will be paid out in this game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. Then, when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends, and the game returns to the game state before the transition to the MB game from the next game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop at the effective line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops at the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside the MB".
In the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to "PB = 1", so that if the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB will always stop at the effective line in this game. , It will not be inside the MB.

Further, the condition device (combination) of the ninth embodiment is roughly classified into a special combination (role), a replay (replay combination), and a small combination.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles, BB, RB, and MB, and two types of replays, replay 1 and replay 2, as small roles: common bell, left correct answer bell, and middle correct answer bell. , Right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2.
The left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell are collectively referred to as "push order bell".
Further, the "condition device" operates in response to the winning number determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more conditional devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and the winning flag corresponding to the activated conditional device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the ninth embodiment, any one of "0" to "16" is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, and the determined winning number corresponds to the determined winning number. Any condition device from non-winning to MB is activated.
Both of the two types of replays will be won individually and will not be won in duplicate with other conditional devices (roles).
In addition, there are four types of bells: common bell, left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell, but all of them are won individually and do not win in duplicate with other roles.

Furthermore, the watermelon has a case of winning alone and a case of winning multiple times with BB.
Further, the cherry 1 has a case of being single-winned and a case of being double-winned with BB, and a cherry 2 has a case of being single-winning, a case of being double-winning with RB, and a case of being double-winning with BB. ..
In addition, BB has a case of winning alone and a case of winning multiple times with watermelon, cherry 1 or cherry 2, but RB does not win alone, only wins duplicately with cherry 2, and MB. Will only win alone and will not win multiple roles with other roles.

Further, the “dividend” means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each condition device is stopped (the winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell, the payout differs between the specified number 3 (gaming state other than in MB) and the specified number 1 (in MB), but other than that, The dividend is the same for the specified number 3 and the specified number 1.

The left correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the left first stop is in the correct push order and the other than the left first stop is in the incorrect answer push order. In the specified number 3, eight medals are paid out in the correct push order. , One medal is paid out in the order of incorrect answering, and 14 medals are paid out in the order of correct answering, and 15 medals are paid out in the order of incorrect answering.
Similarly, the middle correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the middle first stop is in the correct push order, and the right first stop is in the correct answer push order except for the middle first stop. , It is a push order bell that is an incorrect push order except for the first stop on the right.
The common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the pushing order.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The winning combination lottery means 61 draws a winning number. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.
Further, the lottery of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the ninth embodiment, any one of the winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. Further, the winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to the conditional devices of "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. Then, when the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined, the condition device of "replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Further, when the winning number "8" is determined, the condition device of "watermelon + BB" corresponding to the winning number "8" operates.
As described in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 is based on the random number generation means, the random number extraction means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means. It is provided with a winning number determining means for determining a winning number, and when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.
Then, for example, the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means is the same in the non-internal and the internal inside, and the operating condition device may be the same, or the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means is the same. The condition device to be used may be different.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all the combinations. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). ..

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is set. It is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10". The two winning flags of "" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, since the winning information of the roles other than the special role (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if the winning role that does not carry over the winning information is won in this game and the winning flag of that role is turned on, that role At the end of this game, the winning flag will be turned off regardless of whether or not the player has won.
On the other hand, the winning information of the special role (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, so once the special role is won in the game this time and the winning flag of the winning special role is turned on, the special role will be The winning flag remains on until a prize is won, and when the special role wins, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10". The two winning flags are turned on, but if "BB" does not win in this game, "Cherry" will be displayed at the end of this game regardless of whether or not "Cherry 1" has won in this game. The winning flag of "1" is turned off, and the winning flag of "BB" is kept on. In this case, from the next game, it shifts to the inside of the BB.

Further, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, in addition to the winning flag of the "BB" carried over, the "cherry" corresponding to the winning number "9" is added. The winning flag of "cherry 1" included in the condition device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags of "cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
For this reason, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (double winning of "cherry 1 + BB") and inside the BB, the winning number "9" is decided by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. The on / off state of the winning flag is the same as when it is decided (winning "Cherry 1" alone).

In addition, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning flags of all the small roles (common bell, left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2). turn on. Therefore, although it is not won by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, it is in the same state as winning all the small winning combination.
For example, during the MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0" does not include any winning combination, but all of them. The winning flag of the small winning combination (the above 7 small winning combination) is turned on.
Further, for example, during the MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the "replay 1" included in the condition device of the "replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the winning flag, the winning flags of all the small wins (the above seven small wins) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a reel control means 65, and the reel control means 65 is a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to on / off of the winning flag. To be equipped with. Further, each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
When the winning number is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the winning flag control means 62 controls the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means 65 selects the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag.

Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is set based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. It is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.
In addition, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of replay 1 is on and the winning flags other than replay 1 are off is such that the symbol combination corresponding to replay 1 stops at the valid line. The stop position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the combinations other than the replay 1 do not stop at the effective line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct answer bell are off is when the stop switch 42 is operated in the left first stop. , The symbol combination for paying out eight medals stops at the effective line, and when the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop, the symbol combination for paying out one medal stops at the effective line. As described above, the stop position of each reel 31 is determined.

In addition, the column of "internal lottery number" in FIG. 26C shows the number of winning numbers in each game state. Dividing the number of internal lottery by "65536" gives the winning probability.
For example, since the number of winning numbers "4" in non-RT is "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the "left" corresponding to the winning number "4". The probability that the condition device of "correct answer bell" is activated is "3000/65536".

Further, in the column of "internal lottery number" in FIG. 26C, the "*" mark indicates that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Here, the "advantageous section" means a game section having the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated).
Further, the "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
Furthermore, the "operation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct push order when the push order bell is won.

Further, the "advantageous section lottery" means a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.
Then, when the player wins the advantageous section lottery and shifts to the advantageous section, the instruction function can be activated, and the correct push order can be notified when the push order bell is won.
For example, the number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*", which is the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) in non-RT.
When the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined by the lottery by, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in non-RT, when the winning number "0" (non-winning) is determined, and the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct answer bell", " When it is determined to be "middle correct answer bell" or "right correct answer bell"), the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but in other cases, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Furthermore, in the RT, RB inside, and BB inside, when the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct answer bell", "middle correct answer bell", or "right correct answer bell") are determined. Except for this, when the winning number is determined to be the same as the non-RT, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, since the winning information of the BB is carried over inside the BB, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") is determined inside the BB and at the non-RT (non-internal). The on / off state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning number "10" (duplicate winning of "cherry 1 + BB") is determined.
Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "10" (duplicate winning of "cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") in BB Is set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") is determined in the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") is determined inside the RB, the winning flag of "cherry 1" and the winning flag of the carried-over "RB" are turned on. ..
Furthermore, "BB" and "RB" are the same in that they are both special roles (roles), and the winning number "10" (double winning of "cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal). The number of units and the number of units of the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") in the RB are set to the same "200".
Therefore, even when the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") is determined in the RB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "12" (duplicate winning of "cherry 2 + RB") or winning number "13" (duplicate winning of "cherry 2 + BB") is determined in non-RT, and inside the RB or inside the BB, the winning number is won. When the number "11" (single winning of "cherry 2") is decided, the winning flag of "cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special role (role) are turned on.
Furthermore, the total number of winning numbers "12" (duplicate winning of "cherry 2 + RB") and winning number "13" (duplicate winning of "cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT is "300", which is "300" in the inside of RB and BB. It matches the number "300" of the winning number "11" (single winning of "cherry 2") in the inside.
Therefore, even when the winning number "11" (single winning of "cherry 2") is determined in the inside of the RB and inside the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, the column of "number of lottery lottery for advantageous section" in FIG. 26C shows the number of each winning number. Dividing the number of advantageous section lottery by "16384" gives the winning probability.
For example, in non-RT, inside RB, or inside BB, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 is It becomes "20/16384".
Further, for example, in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is "10000/16384". ".

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB = 1".
Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the lottery of MB is performed in non-RT and RT, but when the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB in this game always stops at the valid line, so that the MB From the next game, it will shift to the MB game without being inside.
Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), during the MB game, a lottery for replay 1 or replay 2 is performed, and all the small wins are repeatedly won regardless of the lottery result by the role lottery means 61. Become.

For this reason, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all the small roles (common bell, left correct answer bell, middle) The winning flags of the correct answer bell, the right correct answer bell, the watermelon, the cherry 1 and the cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 2" and the winning flag of all the small wins are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all the small wins are turned on. Selects the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on. However, during the MB game, the specified number is 1 (1 card is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT, etc., and 14 or 15 cards are paid out.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game and the stop switch 42 is operated at the left first stop (when the push order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination for paying out 15 medals stops at the effective line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop (when the push order is incorrect), the symbol combination for paying out 15 medals is Stop at the active line.

Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the right correct answer bell is on is selected, and the right At the time of the first stop (when the push order is correct), 14 cards are paid out, and at the time other than the right first stop (when the push order is incorrect), 15 cards are paid out.
Then, in the first game during the MB game, the push order for paying out 14 cards is notified, and in the second game during the MB game, the push order for paying out 15 cards is notified.
As described above, the end condition of the MB game is set that the number of medals to be paid out exceeds 14, and therefore, by performing such notification, 29 medals are paid out during the MB game. Can be done. Further, since the specified number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can obtain 27 medals obtained by subtracting the input number "2" from the payout number "29".

Further, in order to notify the player of the pushing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to the advantageous section.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26C, the winning of the advantageous section lottery when the winning number "15" (single winning of "MB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT or RT. The probability is set to "16384/16384", that is, "100%".

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the effect group number selection means 64. The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26 (c), the production group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Specifically, the production group numbers "0" to "3" are determined corresponding to the winning numbers "0" to "3", and the production group numbers "4" correspond to the winning numbers "4" to "6". , And the production group numbers "5" to "13" are defined corresponding to the winning numbers "7" to "15".
Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a push order instruction number selection means 63. The push order instruction number selection means 63 is the winning number determined when the winning number corresponding to the push order bell (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell) is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61. This is for selecting the push order instruction number (the number corresponding to the correct push order) corresponding to.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the control command transmitting means 71. The control command transmission means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output by the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 uses the control command as control commands, such as information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a push order instruction number (during AT and correct push). In addition to the winning number corresponding to the conditional device having the order (only when the winning number is determined), the production group number, the information when the stop switch 42 is operated, the information of the winning combination, etc., the gaming state (non-RT, RT) , RB inside, BB inside, RB inside, BB inside, MB inside), and the effect group number and the like are transmitted to the sub control board 80.

As a result, the sub control board 80 side determines the game state on the main control board 50 side and the condition device (excluding the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell) operating by the combination lottery means 61. be able to.
On the sub-control board 80 side, it can be determined from the effect group number that the player has won either the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell, but the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell. It is not possible to judge which of the two was won (correct answer push order).
Further, during AT, the correct push order can be notified by the push order instruction number.

Further, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, and the like of the effect during the game and the game standby.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected to each other, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80, and information (information necessary for output of the effect) is required. Control command) is sent.
Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Further, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes the effect output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 includes the effect determination table and the like.
Further, the effect determination table defines the effect to be output, and a plurality of the effect is provided, and the effect output control means 91 determines the effect to be output using any of the effect determination tables, and the determined effect. Is controlled to output.
That is, the effect output control means 91 determines what kind of effect is to be output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and any of the effect determination tables, and the determination is made. According to this, the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 is controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an effect determination table used in common for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and FIG. 28 is an effect determination table commonly used in RB and BB. It is a figure which shows.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, 18 types of effect patterns from "no effect" to "continuous effect" are provided. In addition, each production pattern from "character production (lively)" to "continuous production" defines different productions.
For example, the "fixed effect" is an effect that allows the player to know that the special role has been won, and the "notification effect after the first stop" is after the first stop (after the operation of the first stop switch 42). The effect is output at the timing, the "left first stop effect" is an effect that instructs the left stop switch 42 to be operated first, and the "continuous effect" is a continuous effect over a plurality of games. It is a production that is output.

Further, the column of "number of distributions of effect patterns" in FIG. 27 shows the number of distributions of each effect pattern when each effect group number is received. Dividing the number of effect pattern distributions by "256" gives the selection probability of each effect pattern. In FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is described below each effect group number.
For example, in non-RT, the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, and the selection probability of "no production" when the production group number "1" is transmitted is It is "128/256", the selection probability of "character production (lively)" is "20/256", the selection probability of "conversation production (lively)" is also "20/256", and "cut-in production". The selection probability of "(strong production)" is "0/256".

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 indicates the game state (non-RT, RT, inside the RB, inside the BB, inside the RB, during the BB, during the MB) with respect to the sub-control board 80, and Send the production group number.
Then, the effect output control means 91 of the sub control board 80 selects an effect determination table according to the game state based on the information indicating the game state received from the main control board 50, and the selected effect determination table and the main Based on the effect group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which effect pattern to output, and the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 is controlled according to the determination.

Here, in the non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 and the production group number "12" is transmitted, the production output. The control means 91 selects an effect determination table used in common for non-RT and RT (non-AT) shown in FIG. 27, and places a column for the effect group number “12” (single winning of “BB”) in this effect determination table. The number is used to determine which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" is won alone in non-RT, for example, "continuous production" is selected with a probability of "40/256".

On the other hand, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the effect group number "0" is transmitted inside the BB, the effect output control means 91 Select the effect determination table used in both the RB interior and the BB interior shown in FIG. 28, and use the number of columns of the effect group number “0” (“non-winning”) in this effect determination table to use any effect. Decide whether to output the effect of the pattern. As shown in FIG. 28, at the time of "non-winning" in the BB, for example, "fixed effect" is selected with a probability of "80/256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 is a game in which the combination lottery means 61 independently wins the "BB" in the non-RT (non-internal) and the combination lottery means 61 "non-winning" in the BB. The production to be output is determined by using a different production determination table for the game. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Further, in the non-RT, when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 is the winning number "14" on the main control board 50 side. The winning flag of "BB" included in the condition device of "BB" corresponding to "" is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "BB single stop position determination table".

In the "BB independent stop position determination table", each reel 31 is stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops at the effective line and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than BB does not stop at the effective line. The position is fixed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 is based on the "BB independent stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the above is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

Further, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is obtained in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 is carried over to the "BB" on the main control board 50 side. Keep the winning flag on and turn off the other winning flags. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, in the non-RT, the same "BB independent stop position determination table" as when the "BB" is independently won by the winning combination lottery means 61 is selected.
Therefore, when the winning combination lottery means 61 becomes "non-winning" inside the BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 as when the winning combination lottery means 61 independently wins the "BB" in the non-RT is performed. Further, "stop control of the same reel 31 is performed" means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same mode (pushing order and operation timing), each reel 31 stops at the same position and is the same. It means that the stop roll is displayed.

In this way, the main control board 50 side is the same when the winning combination lottery means 61 independently wins the "BB" in the non-RT and when the winning combination lottery means 61 becomes "non-winning" inside the BB. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined by using the stop position determination table of the above, but the sub-control board 80 side determines the effect to be output by using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
As a result, even if the stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
Further, even if the same reel 31 is stopped and controlled on the main control board 50 side and the same stop result is displayed, different effects are output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the special role is won. It is possible to make it possible for the player to guess that it is (inside).

Furthermore, by selecting different production determination tables on the sub-control board 80 side between the non-RT "BB" single winning and the "non-winning" inside the BB, the non-RT "BB" alone is selected. At the time of winning, the production decision table with a low selection probability of the final production (the production that the player knows that the BB has been won) is selected, and at the time of "non-winning" inside the BB, the selection probability of the final production is high. The decision table can be selected.
As a result, in the game in which "BB" is won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that "BB" has been won, and in the inside of the BB, it is a game that "BB" has been won. By making it easy for the player to understand, it is possible to make the player aim for the prize of "BB", prevent the inside of the BB from continuing indefinitely, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, in the non-RT, when the winning number "8" (duplicate winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the effect group number "6" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 The effect determination table used in common for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal) shown in FIG. 27 is selected, and the effect group number “6” (“watermelon + BB”) is duplicated in this effect determination table. ) Is used to determine which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "watermelon + BB" is won in duplicate in non-RT, for example, there is a probability of "50/256" of "character production (lively)", "conversation production (lively)", or "cut-in production (cut-in production). "Strong production" is selected, and "Continuous production" is selected with a probability of "30/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the effect group number "5" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 Selects the effect determination table used in both the inside of the RB and the inside of the BB shown in FIG. 28, and uses the number of columns of the effect group number “5” (single winning of “watermelon”) in this effect determination table. , Determine which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 28, when the "watermelon" in the BB is won alone, for example, "character production (lively)" or "conversation production (lively)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and "20". Select continuous production with a probability of "/ 256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 is a game in which the combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon + BB" in the non-RT (non-internal), and the combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon" independently in the BB. The output production is determined using a different production determination table depending on the game played. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, during non-internal, in order to keep the player's expectation for the "BB" winning for a long time by showing the player the continuous production over multiple games, the selection of the continuous production at the time of "watermelon + BB" duplicate winning The probability is set high.
On the other hand, inside the BB, if the player is shown to the continuous production over multiple games, the "BB" prize will be delayed by that amount and the player's medals will decrease, so the "watermelon" alone will be won. The selection probability of the continuous effect at the time is set low, and the selection probability of the definite effect at the time of "non-winning" is set high in order to make the player aim for the "BB" prize at an early stage.
In the inside of the BB, the winning probability of each winning combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning may be set so that the player's medals do not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous production may be set high.

Further, in the non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "8" (duplicate winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 is on the main control board 50 side. , Turn on the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" included in the condition device of "watermelon + BB" corresponding to the winning number "8", and turn off the other winning flags. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as "watermelon + BB duplication stop position determination table".

The "watermelon + BB duplication stop position determination table" is provided so that the symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon or BB can be stopped at the effective line, and the symbol combinations corresponding to the roles other than watermelon and BB do not stop at the effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 is based on the "watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

Further, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 is carried over on the main control board 50 side. While keeping the winning flag of "BB" on, in addition, turn on the winning flag of "watermelon" included in the condition device of "watermelon" corresponding to the winning number "7", and "watermelon" and "BB". The winning flags other than "" are turned off. As a result, the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. That is, in the non-RT, the same "watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table" as when the "watermelon + BB" is duplicated by the winning combination lottery means 61 is selected.

Therefore, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon" alone inside the BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 as when the winning combination lottery means 61 repeatedly wins the "watermelon + BB" is performed in the non-RT. ..
In this way, when the combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon + BB" twice in the non-RT and when the combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon" independently inside the BB, the main control board 50 side The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table, but the sub-control board 80 side determines the effect to be output using different effect determination tables. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, when "Cherry 1 + BB" is won twice in non-RT, and when "Cherry 1" is won alone in BB, when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice in non-RT, and inside BB As in the case of winning the "watermelon" alone, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control board 80 side uses a different effect determination table. Use to determine the output effect. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Furthermore, when "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" is won twice in non-RT, and when "Cherry 2" is won alone in BB or RB, it becomes "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table on the main control board 50 side, as in the case of duplicate winning and when the "watermelon" is independently won in the BB, but the sub control On the substrate 80 side, an effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
As a result, even if the stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the effects can be diversified.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the number of distributions of each effect pattern is the same when the "watermelon" is independently won in the non-RT and when the "watermelon" is independently won in the BB. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same.
However, when the "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the winning flag of "watermelon" is on and the other winning flags are off. When a single "watermelon" is won inside the BB, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. To do. Therefore, the stop control of the reel 31 is different between when the "watermelon" is independently won in the non-RT and when the "watermelon" is independently won in the BB.
In this way, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same on the sub-control board 80 side when the "watermelon" is independently won in the non-RT and when the "watermelon" is independently won in the BB. On the main control board 50 side, the stop control of the reel 31 is different.

As described above, in the plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same. Therefore, when the same condition device is operated, the stop control (selected stop position determination table) of the reel 31 for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table). ) May be different.

Further, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the same conditions are met. When the device is activated, the stop control (selected stop position determination table) of the reel 31 for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may be different. ..

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the same condition device is used. When is activated, the stop control (selected stop position determination table) of the reel 31 for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may be different.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) Type of winning combination, type of conditional device, type of gaming state, specified number in each gaming state, payout at the time of winning each winning combination, allocation of internal lottery number, advantageous section lottery The allocation of numbers, the types of effect patterns, the allocation of the number of distributions for each effect pattern, etc. are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to the content of the game.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table of the internal lottery and the advantageous section lottery in the setting 1 is shown, but six stages from the setting 1 to the setting 6 are provided as the setting values, and each set value has a different internal. A table of numbers for lottery and advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the game state and the effect group number to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub control board 80 side determines the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects the effect pattern with a probability according to the game state and the condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit the winning number determined by the internal lottery to the sub-control board 80, and transmits information indicating the condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by the internal lottery. May be good. Then, the sub-control board 80 side may determine the condition device on the main control board 50 side based on the received winning number and the information indicating the condition device.

Further, for example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the condition device determined by the internal lottery and information on the winning combination to the sub control board 80. Then, on the sub control board 80 side, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating the condition device and the information of the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, the sub control board 80 receives the information indicating that the "BB" has been won, but if the information indicating that the "BB" has won the prize is not received, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side is changed. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the information indicating the effect group number, the winning number, and the condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side. The production pattern may be selected.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each combination and information on the winning combination to the sub-control board 80. Then, on the sub control board 80 side, the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating the on / off of the winning flag and the information of the winning combination.
For example, if the information indicating that the winning flag of "BB" is on is received, but the information indicating that "BB" has won is not received, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side is inside the BB. Can be judged.

Further, since the lottery of "BB" is not performed inside the BB, when the information indicating that only the winning flag of "BB" is on is received inside the BB, the internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is performed. It can be determined that the winning number is "0"("non-winning").
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side also determined on the sub control board 80 side, the effect pattern on the sub control board 80 side. May be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, "single winning" is used to mean that only a role other than the special role is won, and the special role is not won at the same time, and "duplicate winning" is used. , It is used to mean that the special role and other roles other than the special role are elected at the same time.
For example, the winning of "watermelon + control role 1" in the BB is a duplicate winning in the sense that multiple types of roles are won at the same time, but only the roles other than the special role are won, and the special role is. Since they have not been elected at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, they are elected alone.

Further, when the "watermelon + control combination 1 + BB" is won (duplicate winning) inside the BB and when the "watermelon + control combination 1" is won (single winning) inside the BB, the main control board 50 side Since the on / off states of the winning flags are the same, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table, but since the winning number and the effect group number are different, on the sub control board 80 side, The effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table.
It should be noted that the "control combination" is a combination for making the stop position determination table to be selected different by making the on / off state of the winning flag different, and making the stop control of the reel 31 different, and winning a prize. Not a role for.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number "11" (single winning of "cherry 2") is determined in the inside of the RB and inside the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed, but there are a plurality of types. It is also possible not to execute the advantageous section lottery when the winning combination with the special winning combination is won.
(7) The various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments and the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<10th Embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to the control of the display of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress) and a setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on the power on (for example, when the power is turned on, when the first interrupt process is started, when a program is started, etc.). (Setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress), control is performed so that all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are lit in the RWM abnormality error state.
As described in the second embodiment, since the management information display LED 74 is composed of a 4-digit LED, “8888” is displayed when all the LEDs are turned on. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the LED of the management information display LED 74.

If the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on, the setting shifts to a setting change state in which the set value can be changed. Further, when the setting change state is entered, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
Then, 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to be longer than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state when the setting key switch is turned on at the time of power-on. There is.

Here, for example, it is assumed that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state. In this case, first, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on, then the management information is once displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on again. Therefore, there is a possibility that the manager (the clerk in the hall) may suspect that there is something wrong with the game machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to 5 seconds.
The lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, and any time is longer than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state. May be set to.

Further, the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be described below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LED included in the management information display LED 74 is referred to as "digit 6", "digit 7", "digit 8", and "digit 9" in order from the left side.
Among the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs on the left side (digits 6 and 7) are referred to as "identification segments", and the two LEDs on the right side (digits 8 and 9) are referred to as "ratio". Called "Seg".

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of the identification segment Digit 7: Lower digit of the identification segment Digit 8: Upper digit of the ratio segment Digit 9: Lower digit of the ratio segment.
Further, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED composed of segments A to G and segment DP.

The test pattern of the management information display LED 74 is displayed in order to confirm whether all the segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly turned on and off. Therefore, during the period (time) in which the test pattern is displayed, all the segments are set to have a lighting state and a lighting state.
Further, when the test pattern is displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at any of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the specified timing based on power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from the setting change start processing (3) Setting change (mode) in progress (4) Setting confirmation (mode) in progress (5) RWM error error

The first test pattern is to switch a predetermined display every second and display it for 5 seconds. The time for maintaining one display is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (it may be other than 5 seconds).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs have a state of being lit and a state of being turned off during the display time of the test pattern of 5 seconds.
Secondly, as a test pattern, all segments of all LEDs are blinked. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off by blinking once (turning on and off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In the test pattern display of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 described later, the lit segment is indicated by a solid line, and the lit segment is indicated by a dotted line. Further, in the segment DP, the lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and the extinguishing response is indicated by a white circle.
Further, in the following description, "." Indicates that the segment DP is in the lit state, and "." Indicates that the segment DP is in the off state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display of each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern that displays "0.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are lit and segment G is extinguished.
The other is a pattern that displays "-.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which the segment G is lit and the segments A to F and DP are extinguished.
Therefore, "0." and "-." Have the opposite relationship between the on and off segments, respectively.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29A, "0." is displayed in the upper digit of the identification segment and the upper digit of the ratio segment, and "-." Is displayed in the lower digit of the identification segment and the lower digit of the ratio segment.
Further, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29 (a) is maintained for 1 second. The count for 1 second may be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of FIG. 29 (a) is started, "447 (D)" is set in the counter, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when it becomes "0", FIG. 29 (a) The display of a) may be terminated. As a result, the display of FIG. 29 (a) can be maintained for "2.235 x 447 = 999.045 ms".

After finishing the display of FIG. 29 (a) for about 1 second, the display shifts to the display of FIG. 29 (b).
Further, the display of FIG. 29 (b) is a replacement of the LED displaying "0." and the LED displaying "-." With respect to the display of FIG. 29 (a). That is, contrary to the display of FIG. 29 (a), the display of FIG. 29 (b) displays "-." In the upper digit of the identification segment and the upper digit of the ratio segment, and the lower digit of the identification segment and the lower digit of the ratio segment. Is displayed as "0."
Further, as in the case of FIG. 29 (a), the display state shown in FIG. 29 (b) is continued for 1 second (447 interrupts).

The display contents of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b) are switched and displayed every second, and this is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display contents as (a), and (d) has the same display contents as (b).
Then, when the display of the test pattern (5 seconds) is completed, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “7. U. 5.0.”. Further, the accessory ratio may be displayed instead of the advantageous section ratio.

As described above, when "0." and "-." Are displayed on the LED, it is possible to create a lighting state and a lighting state for all the segments (A to G and DP), so that the segment is defective (lights up). It is possible to easily visually determine (cannot be turned off or cannot be turned off).
Further, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment may be displayed as "0.-." Or "-. 0.". Therefore, there is no risk of confusing the test pattern with the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing Example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display content was changed every second, and the test pattern was displayed for 5 seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from the setting change start process.
On the other hand, the test pattern display example 2 shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying the test pattern until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormality error. ..
Of course, the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used when displaying until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Similarly, it goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used when displaying within a predetermined period from the time when the start condition of the test pattern display is satisfied.

In Example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." Is a state in which all the segments of all the LEDs are turned on, and "*" is a state in which all the segments of all the LEDs are turned off. *. *. *. ”(“ * ”Indicates that the segments A to G are extinguished) are alternately repeated. In other words, it is a pattern in which "8.8.8.8." Is blinked and displayed.
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, the lighting state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30A is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the lighting state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30B is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Then, by repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30A and the extinguishing state shown in FIG. 30B, the blinking state is set.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, "134 (D)" is set as the initial value of the timer, the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing of 2.235 ms, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or the lighting time or It is judged that the light-off time has passed. As a result, "299.49" ms can be counted by counting the number of interrupts "134".

Also in Example 2 of the test pattern display of FIG. 30, the lighting state and the extinguishing state can be created for all the segments by "8." and "*.". Therefore, it is possible to easily visually determine a segment defect (cannot be turned on or turned off).
In addition, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the blinking display is displayed regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." Is displayed and the segment DP is not lit. On the other hand, in the display of "8.8.", Since the segment DP is also lit, the two are not confused.

Each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all reels 31 are stopped and the payout process is completed). Then, the ratio after the update is displayed in the subsequent interrupt processing. Here, when the power is cut off immediately before the ratio is updated and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is turned off and restored, the ratio is updated (calculated) during the 5 seconds when the test pattern is displayed. To execute. Then, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is started, the updated ratio is displayed after the power is turned off.

<11th Embodiment>
FIG. 31 (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a set value display LED 73 according to the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31 (A), the credit display LED 76 is composed of a digit 1a (upper digit) and a digit 2a (lower digit). Further, the acquired number display LED 78 is composed of a digit 3a (upper digit) and a digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, the "digit" means a display unit (display), and particularly in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment).
Each of these digits 1a to 4a is a 7-segment display including a dot segment (segment P). In particular, the segment P of the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79. In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are shown, but the status display LED 79 is not shown. However, in reality, as shown in FIG. 31A, a credit number display LED76, an acquisition number display LED78, and a status display LED79 are mounted on the display board 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs that display the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the one-bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are all lit.

Further, the game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when the medal is not bet (or the replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, it lights up before the game is completed and the medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Even after the replay is activated, it lights up when betting is possible according to the number of credits. Then, when the number of bets is the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the input display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when the replay wins, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay winning, the replay display LED 79f lights up to notify the player that the automatic bet state is in effect.
Examples of the state display LED 79 (not shown in FIG. 31 (A)) include a settlement display LED (an LED that lights up during the settlement process), but the illustration is omitted in FIG. 31 (A).

Further, in FIG. 31B, the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29, and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b to 4b are 7-segment displays including dot segments (segments P), similarly to the digits 1a to 4a described above. The digits 1b to 4b display the information type upper, the information type lower, the numerical upper, and the numerical lower, respectively.
Further, the segment P of the digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit grouping display LED. The digit delimiter display LED is used to clarify the delimiter between the information type and the numerical value.

Further, the segments P of the digits 1b to 4b can be lit when displaying the test pattern, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31C, the set value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. 10, and is an LED that displays the current set value during setting change and setting confirmation, and is one (1 digit). ) Is composed of the digit 5b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b and the segments A to G and P in the present embodiment.
The 7-segment digit is a 7-segment display composed of 7 rod-shaped segments A to G and 1 dot-shaped segment P. An LED composed of segments A to G having no segment P may be referred to as "7-segment", and an LED composed of eight segments including the segment P may be referred to as "8-segment". In the book, it is called "7-segment" including the LED composed of 8 segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, in the digit 1a, the segments A to G constitute the upper digit 7-segment of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment P is unused. Similarly, each of the segments A to G of the digits 2a and 3a constitutes 7 segments of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.
Further, the segments A to G of the digit 4a form the lower digit 7-segment of the acquired number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is an LED constituting the status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, the segment A of the digit 5a corresponds to the 1-bet display LED 79a, the segment B corresponds to the 2-bet display LED 79b, ..., The segment F corresponds to the replay display LED 79f. Further, the segments G and P of the digit 5a are not provided.

The digits 1b to 4b constitute the management information display LED 74, and the segments 1b and 2b display the information type of the management information. Further, the segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in the segments 1b and 2b among the management information. Segments P of digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally turned off, but are turned on when the test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. Further, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit grouping display LED for clarifying the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value and facilitating the confirmation. It should be noted that the digit grouping display LED may be repeatedly turned on and off in the same manner as the segment P of the other digits during the display of the test pattern described above, but may be turned on all the time.

Further, of the digits 5b, the segments A to G form the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73, and the segment P is an LED that lights up during the setting change. That is, among the setting value display LEDs 73, when the segment P is off, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. The segment P of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during the setting change.

Further, FIG. 32 illustrates the structure of the segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, the D0 bit corresponds to the segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to the segment B, ..., The D7 bit corresponds to the segment P.
For example, when "0" is displayed on the digit 1a, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and P are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111 (B)".

Further, when "1" is displayed on the digit 4a and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the segments B, C, and P are turned on, so that the segment data is "10000110 (B)".
Furthermore, before the start of the game, when three medals are bet and the game can be started, the 1-bet display LED79a, the 2-bet display LED79b, the 3-bet display LED79c, and the game start display LED79d are turned on, so that the digit The segment data of 5a is "000011111 (B)".

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an output port 52 according to the eleventh embodiment. The type of output port is not limited to that shown in FIG. 33.
As the output port 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port for transmitting a digit signal (output port 2) and two output ports for transmitting a segment signal (output ports 3 and 4) are provided. ..
The output port 3 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the credit number display LED76, the acquired number display LED78, and the status display LED79 (digits 1a to 5a).
Further, the output port 4 is an output port for transmitting the segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73.

Digit 1 to 5 signals are assigned to the D0 to D4 bits of the output port 2, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from the D0 bit of the output port 2, both the digit 1a (credit number display LED76 (upper digit)) and the digit 1b (management information display LED74 (information type upper)) are displayed. A drive signal is supplied.

Further, in the output port 2, the D5 to D7 bits are unused.
The output port 3 is an output port for the segments A to P signals of the digits 1a to 5a, and the segments A to P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits.
Similarly, the output port 4 is an output port for the segments A to P signals of the digits 1b to 5b, and the segments A to P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits.
Furthermore, external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal are output from the output port 5.

Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as a hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in a hall) via the external centralized terminal plate 100. Specifically, for example, an advantageous section, AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is operating, an error occurring in the slot machine 10, an external signal 4 indicating that a power failure has occurred, or the like. , An external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the data strobe signal, it controls to acquire the sub-control data signal from the buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
From the output ports (not shown) other than the output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. 33, for example, the signal of the motor 32, the signal of the blocker 45, the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, and the condition device signal (so-called winning number). , Sub-control data signal, test signal, etc. are output.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt, the LED display counter value, the digit signal, and the segment signal in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In the present embodiment, as the processing of the main control board 50, the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41 described later) performed for each game and the interrupt processing (interrupt processing once every 2.235 ms) in parallel with the main process (FIG. 41 described later). I_INTR) (FIG. 53, which will be described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is 1-byte data and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is to be turned on. As for each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to the digit 2 signal, ..., And the D4 bit is assigned to the digit 5 signal. Then, in the one-interrupt process, the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) are dynamically lit so as to illuminate the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter.

The LED display counter of the present embodiment takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter is updated so that the bit “1” of the LED display counter value is shifted to the right by one digit as the interrupt “1” → “2” → ... (for each interrupt). Further, in FIG. 34, in the interrupt next to the interrupt "5", the LED display counter becomes "00000000000 (B)" by shifting to the right by one digit. At the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized. Set the LED display counter to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values of "5"-> "4"-> ...-> "1"-> "5"-> "4"-> ... for each interrupt process. That is, 5 interrupts make one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N + 1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N + 2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N + 3" interrupt: 000000010 (B)
"N + 4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N + 5" interrupt: 00000000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N + 6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
Will be.

In the eleventh embodiment, the five interrupts form one cycle, and the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b are turned on. Specifically, in FIG. 34 (A), for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables the digits 5a and 5b to be lit. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquired number display LEDD78 and the numerical lower digit of the management information display LED74 can be lit. ..

Further, FIG. 34B is a diagram showing a data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit that is permitted to be lit. As shown in FIG. 34B, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0th bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., And the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. is there. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of the output port 2.
As shown in FIG. 34 (B), digits 1 to 5 can be lit during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be lit during setting change, and digits 1 to 5 can be lit during setting confirmation. is there. In addition. "Normal" refers to waiting for a game and during a game.

Then, in the interrupt processing, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that lights up in the current interrupt processing.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal)", the AND operation of both results in "00010000 (B)" and the digit 5 Only the signal is "1". However, during normal operation (during game standby and during game), the segment signal is output from the output port 3 so that the status display LED 79 can be turned on, but the segment signal is not output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 is used. It is controlled so that (digit 5b) is not turned on.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), the segment signal is output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is displayed. It can be lit.
Further, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED78 The upper digit) and the digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output, and "88" (content indicating that the setting is being changed) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Furthermore, when the segment signal of the output port 3 is generated at the interrupt timing (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34) when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)", the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. Do it by. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, the value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and "10000000 (B)" is output as a segment signal from the output port 3. As a result, the segment P (advantageous section display LED77) of the digit 4a can be turned on.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, name and content of the data stored in the RWM 53.
The data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in the description of the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address "F000 (H)" is a storage area for set value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the set value data. In this embodiment, it has set values "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0 (H)" to "5 (H)" is stored as the set value data.
Then, on the set value display LED 73, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the set value data is displayed as the set value.

The address "F010 (H)" is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data for displaying on the credit number display LED 76. In the present embodiment, any value from "0" to "50 (D)" is stored as the credit number data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting the number of credits into a decimal number is stored as the number of credits data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001 (B)" is stored in the address "F010 (H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F010 (H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are. , Data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the stored data value is in the range of "0" to "50".
In the present embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the credit number data itself is not provided, and the credit number data is provided as the display data of the credit number display LED 76.

The address "F011 (H)" is a storage area for acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquired number data is data for displaying on the acquired number display LED 78. In the acquired number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digit, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying the upper digit. It is data.
In the present embodiment, when the small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so that the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small winning combination is won and a medal is paid out, the acquired number data is added along with the payout of the medal, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquired number data, "01" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" described later, for example, "8 (H)" is stored when the eight-card winning combination is won, and the payout number data is at the time of medal payout ( (Including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" according to the number of payouts, such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored in the address "F011 (H)" is, for example, "0"->"1"->"2"->...->"8" when eight cards are won. As described above, "1" is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up as “0” → “1” → “2” → ... → “8”.

Further, in the present embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during the setting change, the setting changing display data for displaying "88" is stored as the acquired number data. This is to make it possible to identify from the front side of the game machine that the setting is being changed by displaying "88" on the acquired number display LED 78. Further, by turning on "88" and all the segments, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (there is no segment that cannot be turned on). Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out is 15, it can be understood that when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is not the display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to bet in the game this time) is satisfied, the game is started (before the bet becomes possible or the start switch 41 is operated. Before this is done), a specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) to the acquired number display LED 78. In the present embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 in order to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when the specified number is specified, the specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B (H)".

Further, when the push order bell or the like is won during AT, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The push order instruction information corresponding to the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58, which will be described later, is "= 1" to "= 6", respectively. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. The details will be described later, but the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information "= 1" to "= 6" are ".
"A1 (H)" to "A6 (H)". For example, in the game in which the winning number "3" is won, when the push order instruction information is displayed, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquired number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "= 1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

The address "F030 (H)" is a storage area for the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining the presence / absence of replay and operation of the accessory. For example, when 1BB is operating, the D2 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1".
This operating state flag is updated in the game start set process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, when the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag described later is read and it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped and displayed, and the operation state is established. Set the D0 bit of the flag to "1".
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check process) described later.
In addition, the operating state flag of the accessory is also cleared by the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

The address "F031 (H)" is a storage area of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination that has been stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the D0 bit is replayed and the D2 bit is assigned 1BB. Therefore, the replay of the symbol combination display flag and the 1BB bit are assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned by the operating state flag, respectively.
During the main process of FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination that has been stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically, during the main process of FIG. 41, in step S279 (start switch acceptance process).

The address "F040 (H)" is a storage area for the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when the small winning combination wins the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a small winning combination is won, the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and the medal payout process is executed. Here, the payout number data is deducted by "1" for each medal payout (addition of "1" to the credit number or payout of one actual medal (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041 (H)" is a storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination wins in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the next game medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when a small winning combination of 8 payouts is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and when the winning combination is not won in the next game, it is used as the payout number data buffer. "0" is overwritten.

The address "F042 (H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals automatically bet at the time of winning the replay, and "2" or "3" is stored in the present embodiment.
The automatic bet number data is set in step S325 during the game start set process of FIG. 42.
The address "F043 (H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the game this time, and in the present embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is performed in the medal management process (detecting the inserted medal and performing the bet process and the credit addition process) in step S276 during the main process of FIG. 41.

The address "F051 (H)" is a storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is shown in FIG. 34 (A), and is updated every time interrupt processing is performed, as described above.
The address "F052 (H)" is a storage area of the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is shown in FIG. 34 (B), and takes a value according to normal, setting change, or setting confirmation.

The address "F061 (H)" is a storage area of the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when it is a normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address "F062 (H)" is a storage area of the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag is set to "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag is set to "1".
The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, it is not necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 even after shifting to the advantageous section.
Specifically, first, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on after that (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied before the condition for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on even once. You may end the advantageous section without turning it on.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct answer pressing order is notified) in the gaming state which is an advantageous section and the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on.
Further, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
In addition, a process for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed at the time of the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous section. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the initialization process of the advantageous section display LED flag storage area (clearing process of the advantageous section display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game of activating the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the reel 31 is turned on. Until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, the lighting timing is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example.
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted.
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating
4) When all reels 31 are stopped
5) After all reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended), before the start of the next game, before the settlement switch 43 can be operated.

However, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the winning combination in the game must be determined, so that before the operation of the start switch 41 (before the combination lottery) is excluded. ..
When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game of activating the instruction function, the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery of the winning combination is executed. Therefore, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the rotation of the reel 31 is performed. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

The address "F063 (H)" is a storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is set to "0" during the normal section, and "1500 (D)" is set as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set so that "1" is subtracted per game not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0". Therefore, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", even if "1" is subtracted, the value after subtraction is "0". Therefore, during the normal section, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so that the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)" in the next game.
Since the advantageous section clear counter stores the initial value "1500 (D)" at the maximum, it is composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

The address "F065 (H)" is a storage area of the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the number of differences in the advantageous section, and is also referred to as a “MY counter”.
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores the "corresponding value" to the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to minus, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "cumulative value of difference number ≠ difference counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number in the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

The difference counter only needs to count at least the cumulative value of the number of differences in the advantageous section, and does not have to count in the non-advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that it is an advantageous section, it is necessary to perform each game and a process of determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference counter value is updated including the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated for each game without determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section, so that the processing can be simplified.

Further, even when the difference number becomes negative in this game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number becomes carry-down data, the difference counter value is updated. However, if the difference counter is carry-down data as a result of the calculation, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
2nd game: bet number "3", payout number "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (without correction)
3rd game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (without correction)
4th game: bet number "3", payout number "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (without correction)
Fifth game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
It will be updated as.
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of this game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value reflecting the difference number of the game is changed again. Since it is the calculated result, even in such a case, it corresponds to "update" of the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value that causes a carry, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). The method of determining whether or not a carry has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the number of payouts is large relative to the number of bets, that is, when the number of differences is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal section, the difference counter value increases by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on the winning of a small winning combination, but after that, the number of payouts If is less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

FIG. 36 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value, in which FIG. 36A shows Example 1 and FIG. 36B shows Example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 first shows an example in which the difference number advances in the negative direction as the game progresses, but the difference number starts to increase in the middle, for example, when AT is started. Then, since the difference counter counts the time when the difference becomes the lowest value in the progress process of the game as "0", the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference counter as the amount of increase in the difference. Will be done. As described above, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (the next game is controlled so as to be a game in the normal section).

Since the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", for example, when the difference counter is exactly "2400 (D)" at the end of the game this time, the game this time. Then, the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied.
Then, assuming that the maximum difference number in the game machine is acquired in the next game, the number of bets is "1" and the number of payouts is "15". Therefore, the difference number in the next game is "+14". The difference counter value at the end of the next game is "2414 (D)". When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".

The determination of whether or not the difference counter has exceeded "2400 (D)" is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM53 and determining whether or not it is temporarily stored in a register for updating or the like. It also includes determining the difference counter value that is being used (the same applies hereinafter).
Further, when it is determined whether or not the value exceeds "2400 (D)" based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that the value does not exceed "2400 (D)", The register difference counter value is stored (stored) in the RWM53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM53, and the difference counter value stored in the RWM53 is controlled to be cleared. It is also possible.

Further, Example 2 shows an example in which, as in Example 1, the difference number progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but the difference number starts to increase from the middle, for example, when AT is started. .. In Example 2, even when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section is terminated. That is, regardless of the cumulative value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game up to that point, if the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" counting from the time when the difference number becomes the lowest value, it is an advantageous section. (The next game is controlled so that it is a normal section game).

When updating the difference counter during the normal section, the difference counter may exceed "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, if a special role is won many times and a special game is repeated, such a situation can occur. In such a case
1) How to update the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts,
2) When it exceeds "2400 (D)", there is a method of temporarily resetting the difference counter value to "0" at that point.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section, when the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section, whether or not the processing is in the advantageous section. If the process is executed regardless of this, it is cleared even when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process peculiar to the advantageous section, the difference counter is not cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.
When starting the advantageous section (first game of the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (the initial value "0" is set. Step S354 in FIG. 45, which will be described later). Therefore, there is no problem regardless of the number of difference counters before the start of the advantageous section.
And
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section
2) When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games
Satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section.
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent the data (value) related to the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is started. The clearing of the difference counter is executed in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, in which (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases as the game progresses, and the difference number further decreases from the time when the advantageous section starts (“A” in the figure) to the progress to “B” in the figure. An example is shown. It should be noted that AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the beginning of the advantageous section is CZ, a precursor, and AT is being prepared (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. In the case of a specification that starts from (while waiting for the winning of the replay to win), the difference may decrease even after starting the advantageous section. In addition, even when AT is started, the difference may decrease if the push order bell is not won in the middle.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at the time of "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, the difference counter value is maintained at "0" under the situation where the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, in the figure, the difference counter value remains "0" from the point "A" to the point "B".
In addition, the number of differences started to increase from the point "B". As a result, the difference counter value also increases. Then, when it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (when the point "C" in the figure is reached), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended. (Transition to normal section).

In this way, the positive count by the difference counter starts from the time when the difference becomes the lowest value (“B”) after the start of the advantageous section, not the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section. It is no longer possible to award medals to the player beyond the range in which the number of balls has increased (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37 (a)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from inciting the gambling spirit.

The above points will be described more specifically by taking numerical values as an example.
For example, if the specification is such that AT is started by lottery after starting the advantageous section, and if the section is advantageous and non-AT, the difference may decrease as the game progresses.
For example, suppose player X wins an advantageous section and the advantageous section is started, but AT is not started and the game is stopped when the difference becomes "-200".

Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts the game with the game machine, the AT is won and the AT is started when the difference becomes "-50 sheets". Then, after starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference exceeds "+2400 sheets", the player Y can obtain the medal of "2400 + 250 = 2650 sheets". ..
Therefore, as described above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition "from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value until it exceeds" +2400 sheets "", for example, the fit of another player I try not to incite gambling spirit by preventing it from being acquired including.

In Example 2 shown in FIG. 37 (b), the difference number decreases in the normal section, turns positive from the “D” point in the middle, and further, the advantageous section is started from the “E” point. In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value is positive at the time of "E" in the figure. However, the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, that is, updated to "0") at the start of the advantageous section ("E" in the figure).
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous section (the increase from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be positively counted from the "E" point, and when it exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends.

The description returns to FIG.
The address "F067 (H)" is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the game in the final game of the AT, and is executed, for example, in the game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) described later. Further, the data cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes the AT flag.

The address "F068 (H)" is a storage area of the AT game count counter (_CT_ART). The AT game count counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during AT (including ART). The AT game count counter is different from the advantageous section clear counter, and when it becomes "0", the counting (subtraction) after that is stopped.
The AT game count counter is updated (subtracted) during AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41 to be described later).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the initial value of the AT game count may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game count counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is "255 (D)" or less, the AT game count counter may be composed of a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when shifting to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game count counter. The initial value may be a constant value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when the AT is won. Further, after the initial value is determined, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT games may be added when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT, and the number of AT games may be increased when the player wins the additional lottery. In this case, the increase is added to the AT game count counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, since the game number management type AT is illustrated, an AT game count counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game count counter. Then, at the start of AT, the initial value of the difference number that can be acquired is set. In addition, when the addition is won, the addition difference number is added. Then, the difference number of the game is subtracted every time there is a payout, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.

Subsequently, each process during the game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the program start process of FIG. 38 is executed.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes the registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, setting the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting the type of interrupt (for example, setting it as a masqueradable interrupt), and the parity bit assigned to the control command to be transmitted. (For example, setting to even parity). In other words, the initial values required for the slot machine 10 to operate normally are set in various registers.

Next, the process proceeds to step S203, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power cutoff processed flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, the power off processed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). This power-off processing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. Then, when it is determined that the power cutoff processing completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the value is not normal, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, the checksum calculation of the same range (for example, the work area used in the program, the unused area, and the stack area) as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed at the time of power off processing is executed.
In step S205, it is determined whether or not the range of RWM53 for calculating the checksum is completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM53 for which the checksum is calculated at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for which the checksum is calculated. When it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S204 and the process is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of RWM53 for calculating the checksum is completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

Further, in the subsequent processing as well, when the data stored in the plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM53 is initialized, the same processing is executed in the range of the designated RWM53 in the present embodiment.
When it is determined in step S203 that the power off processing completed flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as the power off / returning data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM53.

In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power supply cutoff / recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, the B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power off processing flag is an abnormal value (when "No" in step S203), or when it is determined that there is an abnormality during the checksum calculation (entire range) of RWM53 in step S204, the power is turned off. An abnormal value is stored as return data.

In the next step S207, the level data of the predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the A register). Next, the process proceeds to step S208, and it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51. Here, the "designated switch" is a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened) and a setting door switch among the predetermined input ports 51 in the present embodiment. (Door provided on the setting key switch. The setting door does not have to be provided) signal, setting key switch (switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction) There are three.

Then, the signal of the door switch is on (the front door 12 is open), the signal of the setting door switch is on (the setting door is open), and the signal of the setting key switch is on. Allow setting changes only at certain times. When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process in step S212, but when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change process in step S212. ..
That is, the signal of the setting key switch even when the signal of the door switch is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch is off (the setting door is closed). Cannot be turned on and there is a high possibility of fraud, so the transition to the setting change process is not allowed.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that the switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data is abnormal. This power supply cutoff / recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

Then, when it is determined that the power off / returning data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined that the data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether or not the setting change impossibility flag is on. Here, the setting change impossible flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279) to the game end check process (step S301) of FIG. 41, which will be described later. It is a flag to be set. Then, when the setting change impossibility flag is on, the process proceeds to step S211. When it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212.
In the present embodiment, the setting change impossible flag is provided, but if the setting can be changed at all times, the setting change impossible flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

In step S211 the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. Then, when it is determined that the power supply cutoff / recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213 to perform the power supply recovery process (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power supply cutoff / recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S214 to perform recovery impossible error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG. 38.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range in the used area of the RWM53. Here, "in the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data related to the progress of the game. The range shown in FIG. 35 is all within the used area. On the other hand, “outside the used area” described later refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data not related to the progress of the game. Specifically, a storage area for storing data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can be mentioned.

The "predetermined range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power off processing has been normally executed, and is set value data (address "F000 (H)"), gaming state (for example, RT state), and winning. The initialization range in which the flag of the special role having the above is not initialized is defined as the "predetermined range".
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the inside of the BB2 is inside before the power is turned off (when the winning flag of the BB2 is on), if the power is turned off normally, the setting change process is executed. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data on advantageous sections or ATs. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the addresses "F061 (H)" to "F068 (H)" are the targets of initialization here.

Next, the process proceeds to step S222, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data (value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off / recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the power off / returning data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores a "specific range" in the register as an initialization range within the used area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power off is not normal, and is the entire range within the used area including the set value data (address "F000 (H)").

Then, the process proceeds to step S224, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the used area of RWM53) is started. In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S224 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S226.

In step S226, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. Originally, the AF register is saved because the F (flag) register is to be saved here, but the AF register is saved for the convenience of the instruction. Then, the process proceeds to step S227, and a predetermined range outside the used area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM53. The "predetermined range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power off processing has been normally executed.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data (value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off / recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S228 that the power off / returning data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores a "specific range" in the register as an initialization range outside the used area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power off is not normal, and is the entire range including a ring buffer that stores the number of games and the number of payouts for displaying the ratio.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the used area of RWM53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S230 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, the start setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S202 are set. Since the timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process in the present embodiment, the process of setting the timer interrupt cycle (“2.235 ms” in the present embodiment) and the like are included. Then, interrupt processing is executed after the processing of step S233. In other words, it is configured so that interrupt processing is not executed before "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request set at the start of setting change is performed. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a register in order to notify the sub control board 80 side that the setting change process is to be started.

The "output request set" means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80. Further, the control command here does not mean only the command actually transmitted, but also means the command that is the source of the command actually transmitted.
Next, the process proceeds to step S235, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM53).

Next, the process proceeds to step S236, and the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) for starting the setting change. In the present embodiment, it waits until the number of interrupts "224" is counted ("1" is subtracted for each number of interrupts and the set number of interrupts becomes "0"). This standby is also called delay processing or standby processing because the main processing is not advanced. During this waiting time (during 2-byte time waiting processing), the main processing is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt processing is executed.

In this way, the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 because the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the sub control board 80 side is executed. Since it takes time to initialize the RWM83, the main control board 50 is executing the waiting process for 2 bytes. In particular, on the main control board 50 side, it is not possible to know whether or not the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the initialization process is still in progress on the sub-control board 80 side, the initialization has already been completed on the main control board 50 side, and the process is further advanced to proceed with the control process of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board. It is possible to prevent the progress of the control process of 80 from being out of synchronization.
Further, after the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change are executed, the sub-control board 80 starts the initialization of the RWM83, but a sufficient time is set as the wait time for the initialization of the RWM83 to be completed. To do. As a result, after the initialization process of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub control board 80 side, the process proceeds to the process after step S238 on the main control board 50 side.

The control command at the start of setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to the process after step S237 (the main process does not proceed).

After the completion of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236, the process proceeds to step S237, and the setting changing display data is stored as the acquired number data. Next, the process proceeds to step S238, and the LED display request flag stores the corresponding value "00011100 (B)" during the setting change.

By the processing of steps S237 and S238, when the interrupt processing is executed after these processing, the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (acquired number display LED78 and set value display LED73) can be lit.
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S238, "8" can be displayed in the digits 3a and 4a, respectively ("88" is displayed in the acquired number display LED 78), and the digit b5 (set value display). The current set value can be displayed on the LED73).
Since the acquired number data and the LED display request flag are initialized by the initialization process in the used area of RWM53 in step S224, the values before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process proceeds to step S239 to execute interrupt waiting processing. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, after the lapse of one interrupt time, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) is detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change switch is turned on by determining the rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the set value data (address “F000 (H)”) of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When interrupt processing is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 is detected. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is fixed.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (waiting for interrupt) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process of step S239 is not provided, if it is determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on, the setting value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S242. If it is determined that this is not the case, the process proceeds to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the rising data of the setting change switch is on.

If the interrupt processing is executed even once after it is determined to be ON in step S240, the rising data of the setting change switch is turned off. However, until the interrupt processing is executed, it continues to be determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on. As a result, the set value data continues to rise by "2" or more just by operating the setting change switch once. Therefore, in step S239, interrupt waiting processing is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) is turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, and the acquired number data is cleared (set to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88" indicating that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245, and the LED display request flag stores the corresponding value “00011111 (B)” during normal operation.

Due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S244, the display of the digits 3a and 4a (acquired number display LED78) is changed from "88" to "00".
Further, by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S245, "0" is displayed in the digits 1a and 2a, respectively ("00" is displayed in the credit number display LED 76). Further, since the bit corresponding to the digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", the digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. On the other hand, the digit 5b (setting value display LED73) does not light because the setting is not being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S246, and the output request set at the end of the setting change is performed in the same manner as in step S234. In this process, the setting change process is terminated, and the data corresponding to the determined set value (specifically, the set value data stored in the address "F000 (H)") is transferred to the sub-control board 80 side. This is the process of setting the control command to inform. Next, the process proceeds to step S247, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 in the same manner as in step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. 38.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register value, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. Of these, it refers to the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read, and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether it is within the range of the set value 1 to the set value 6), in other words, of "F000 (H)". It is determined whether or not the set value data is within the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". When it is determined that the set value data is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253. When it is determined that the set value data is not in the normal range, an "E6" error occurs, the process proceeds to step S264, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing. ..

Proceeding to step S253, the unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register as the initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, the initialization of the RWM 53 in the range set in step S253 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that the value is stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in the unused area. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in the unused area, it may lead to fraudulent acts, so the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). There is.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area in the used area) has been completed, and if it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S256.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as the process of step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, the initialization of the RWM 53 in the range set in step S257 is executed.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed, and if it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is the same as the process of step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, the predetermined input port 51 is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S262 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, a process for setting the timer interrupt cycle, and is the same process as in step S233 described above.
Next, the process proceeds to step S263, and the power off processing flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if it is determined as "No" in step S203 (when the power off processing completed flag is an abnormal value), or when there is an abnormality in the checksum calculation in step S204, step S. In S206, an abnormal value is stored as recovery data after the power is turned off. In this case, since it is determined as "Yes" in step S209, the process proceeds to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 39, since it is determined as "No" in step S222 and step S228, the initialization of the entire range inside and outside the used area of the RWM53, that is, after "F000 (H)". All data in is initialized.

2) In the program start processing, when it is determined that the power off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation is also performed normally, when the setting change processing proceeds, step S222 and step S222 in FIG. 39 Since it is determined as "Yes" in S228, the process proceeds to step S224 and step S230, respectively, and the designated range of RWM53 (inside the used area and outside the used area) is initialized.

3) In the program start process, if the power off processing flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, and the setting change process is not performed, the power restore process in step S213 ( Shift to FIG. 40). In this case, if the set value is normal in step S252 in FIG. 40, the initialization of the RWM 53 (inside the used area and outside the used area) at the time of normal power-on is executed. As described above, this initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the present embodiment. The main process is the process of one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated for each game.
First, in step S271, the stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer refers to an area of RWM53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register value, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. The stack pointer set is a process of setting a register value to an initial value in the area of the RWM53.

In the next step S272, the game start set process (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is a process of generating, updating, saving, and the like of an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the number of bets read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S276, and if it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform the medal insertion waiting process, and then the process proceeds to step S276. The medal insertion waiting process in step S275 determines whether or not the setting key switch is on, and if it is on, performs processing such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode.
In step S276, the inserted medals are managed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has been maintained, determining whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

In the next step S277, the soft random number is updated. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" at a time) a processing random number for processing (calculation processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the winning combination lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of "0" to "65535 (D)". As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (count value (variable) incremented at the time of interrupt) to the value before the update may be executed.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets does not reach the specified number of the game, it is determined as "No" in step S278.

In step S279, the process at the time of accepting the start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting non-changeable flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, setting the number of outputs for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like. ..
In the next step S280, the acquired number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the indicated specified number display data and the payout number data are stored as the acquired number data before that, the data is cleared.
Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, a specified number may be instructed (displayed) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the start of the game. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the indicated specified number display data may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared, and a process of displaying (or turning off) "00" on the acquired number display LED 78 is executed.
Further, when the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the acquired number data at the time of step S280, the payout number data is cleared in this step S280.

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes the update process of the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, whether or not to add the number of AT games during AT is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery by the winning combination lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, the number of additional games of AT is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the added amount is added to the number of AT games counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
After receiving the start switch (step S279), the AT game count counter is updated in step S281. Not limited to this, after the winning combination lottery process in step S282 or after stopping all reels 31 (step S290 or later). The AT game count counter may be updated.
In the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is used after all reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process by winning is completed (after step S300). To update.

In step S282, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes a winning combination lottery (corresponding to the above-mentioned "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of the winning combination lottery is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process of determining whether or not the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning combinations is performed using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes the advantageous section transition lottery process. This process is the process of FIG. 44, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery is also executed at the time of the advantageous section transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later, when the advantageous section is in the non-AT state (for example, when the main game state is CZ), the AT lottery process is executed in step S348 in FIG. 44.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, and the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 48, and when the instruction function is activated in the game (displays the push order instruction number on the acquired number display LED 78) during AT, the push order instruction number is generated. This is a process for displaying push order instruction information.

In the next step S285, the reel rotation start preparation process is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms × 1834 ≈ 4099 ms)". Is. If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum game time is "0", the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process. When the process proceeds to step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start the rotation of the reel 31. Then, when the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, the operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. ..

In step S290, the acquired number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, the display determination of the symbol is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the effective line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and if it is determined that no display error has occurred, step S293 is performed. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, normally, the reel 31 does not stop at a position other than the position defined in the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be originally displayed is displayed on the effective line, it is determined that it is abnormal (“E5” error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Executes non-recoverable error processing.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout number update process is executed. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the above-mentioned payout number data and payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is the process shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S295 to perform interrupt wait processing. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is disabled. By the processing of these steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is disabled immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as step S256 in FIG. 40. Next, the process proceeds to step S298, and the ratio setting process is executed. This "ratio set process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating the ratio, and the like in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and interrupts are permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio set processing is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt processing is prohibited before the execution.

Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio set processing when ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area, and when a program outside the used area is executed in the main processing. This is because when interrupt processing is inserted in, the programs in the used area and the programs outside the used area are mixed, and the processing becomes complicated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, and the game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and clears the condition device (winning combination) flag and the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, and the output request set at the end of the game and the control command set 1 are performed in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed.
Then, when the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248) again.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41.
First, in step S311, the game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time of the present embodiment is set to the "26846" interrupt (≈60,000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game waiting display time becomes "0", the acquired number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out to the game last time is "8" and the player pays by operating the settlement switch 43 and finishes the game, "00" is displayed after about 1 minute. Will be done. This has the effect that the vacant table can be reduced because the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize it as a vacant table.
The acquisition number display LED 78 is not limited to displaying "00", and the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit and lower digit) may be turned off, or the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off to turn off the lower digit. May display "0". In any case, it suffices if the display is executed so that the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize it as an empty table.

Next, the process proceeds to step S312, and the push order instruction number initialization process is executed. This process is a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, the data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, among the data of the symbol combination display flag, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the number of sheets that can be acquired when 1BB is operated (during 1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of sheets that can be acquired in the 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operating state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
Further, in the next step S317, the operating state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operating state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (at this time, for example, stored in the A register) at the address “F030 (H)” of the RWM53. As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S317.
For example, when the symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (at the time of winning 1BB), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".

In the next step S319, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the two games (or when winning twice), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied ( (When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1") is set to "1" in this game start set processing. If it is determined in step S319 that the RB operation has started, the process proceeds to step S320, and if it is determined that the RB operation has not started, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of winnings when the RB is activated are saved. In this process, "2 (H)" is stored (stored) in the game count counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 when the RB is operated, and the RB is provided in the RWM 53 when the RB is operated. This is a process of storing (memorizing) "2 (H)" in the winning count counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to step S321.

In addition, "2 (H)" is set as an initial value for both the game count counter when the RB is activated and the winning counter when the RB is activated, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by "1", respectively. It is a counter that is decremented by "1". However, not limited to this, the initial values of these counter values are set to "0", and each time the number of games or winnings increases by "1", the counter values are incremented by "1", and these counter values become "2 ( It may be determined whether or not "H)" has been reached.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not the condition for indicating the specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the specified number is not specified. However, in the twelfth embodiment described later, since a specified number may be instructed at the start of the game, the processing is included in this flowchart. When it is determined that the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and when it is determined that the condition for instructing the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the indicated specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number "2" is instructed, and when the specified number "2" is instructed, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is defined as "0B (H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, the acquired number data is "0B (H)". Remember.
Further, when the specified number "2" is displayed, "0A" is displayed instead of "02" so as not to be confused with the payout number, the error number, and the push order instruction information.
The number of payouts is displayed by any of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digit. Also, the error number is not displayed as "A" in the lower digit.

Here, the error number (the number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in the present embodiment is as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (No medals for Hopper 35)
H0: Abnormality of payout sensor 37 CE: Medal retention error CP: Illegal passage error of medal CH: Abnormality of passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality of insertion sensor 44 C1: Abnormality of medal insertion error FE: Sub tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Front door open E1: Power off / return error E5: Display judgment error E6: Set value error E7: Random error

The type of error is not limited to the above. An error in which the upper digit of the error number is "E" means an unrecoverable error.
As described above, since "A" is not displayed in the lower digit of the error number, the error number and the specified number of instructions are not confused.
Further, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "= 1" to "= 6". Therefore, the push order instruction information and the specified number of instructions are not confused.

Further, in step S322, before storing the instruction specified number display data as the acquired number data, the payout number data in the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data (when a small winning combination is won in the previous game). ). The payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process (FIG. 49 described later) by winning a prize. Therefore, when storing the instruction specified number display data, the payout number data up to that point may be overwritten. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process for clearing the acquired number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313. When it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the stop display is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads the bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals (bet number data) bet in the previous game. Next, the process proceeds to step S325, and the automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the number of bets read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S326 to set the output request of the operating state. In the next step S327, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay has been activated, that 1BB has been activated, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the past (meaning before the filing of the present application, not "known"; the same applies hereinafter), in step S276 during the bet number addition processing, specifically during the main processing of FIG. 41. In the medal management process, the process of clearing the acquired number data was executed. This will
Even if the small winning combination was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of winning the small winning combination is stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared at the time of the bet number addition processing.
However, in the present embodiment, if the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied before the medal management process is executed, the specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
Then, when the specified number is specified, it is necessary to prevent the specified number display data from being cleared at the time of betting processing. In the present embodiment, when the specified number is instructed, the state in which the specified number is instructed is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the medal management process does not execute the clearing process of the acquired number data, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared by the process of step S280 in FIG. 41.

However, not limited to this, when the specified number is specified, the specified specified number display data is cleared after the operation of the start switch 41, but when the specified number is not specified, the bet number is added during the process as before. You may clear the acquired number data (in the medal management process). In this case, for example, in the bet number addition process, it is determined whether or not the specified number has been specified in the game this time before the clearing process of the acquired number data is executed, and it is determined that the specified number has been specified. Does not clear the acquired number data, and clears the acquired number data when it is judged that the specified number is not specified.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game count counter update process in step S281 in FIG. 41.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is on (“1”). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, the AT game count counter is not updated unless it is in AT.

In step S332, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3". This process reads the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM53 and determines whether or not the bet number of the game is "3". When the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends. In the present embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated (the process related to the instruction function is executed) only when the game is played with the bet number (specified number) "3" during AT. In other words, even during AT, when the game is started with the number of bets (specified number) "2", the AT game count counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

Proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts the value of the AT game count counter by "1". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, similarly, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not subtracted (updated) even during AT if the bet number is not "3".

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG. 41.
In the present embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous section transition lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section transition lottery process and the AT lottery process are executed independently. You may. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be limited to the advantageous section transition lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) of the game this time is "3". When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the number of bets (specified number) is "3", it is possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery in step S345 and the advantageous section transition process (process related to the advantageous section) in step S347, which will be described later, and step S348. AT lottery process (process related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the number of bets (specified number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0”. When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "0" (non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section), step S348 is performed. Proceed to. When the advantageous section type flag is "1" (when the advantageous section is already in progress), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the winning combination lottery result in this game is the target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning combination that is the target of the lottery in the advantageous section is won. Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, when a special role is won alone, when a special role and a small role are won twice, or when a small role (rare small role) is won, it is a target lottery result. to decide. In addition, the target lottery results do not include non-winning. This is because the processing related to the advantageous section is not executed in the non-winning game of the winning combination (the game in which the condition device is not activated).
If it is determined in step S343 that it is the target lottery result, the process proceeds to step S344, and if it is determined that it is not the target lottery result, the process according to this flowchart is terminated (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed or the advantageous section is not selected. Win).

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, among the winning combinations, the middle cherry (single winning or overlapping winning with the special winning combination) is set as the final winning combination (the winning combination in the advantageous section transition lottery). When the middle cherry is won, it can be judged that it is the result of a specific lottery.
If it is determined in step S344 that the result is the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and if it is determined that the result is not the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, if it is not the specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and if it is the specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition process (step S347) is executed without performing the advantageous section transition lottery (always shift to the advantageous section). To do). Even if it is a specific lottery result, it is possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery and set to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability.

In step S345, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. As the advantageous section transition lottery, for example, a lottery may be performed in the same manner as the combination lottery by using a lottery table in which the number of positions according to the combination lottery result is predetermined. For example, if the winning number is "A", there is a 35% chance of winning the advantageous section, and if the winning number is "B", there is a 60% chance of winning the advantageous section, and so on. Can be mentioned.
If the winning combination lottery result is not the target of the advantageous section lottery, the result is "No" in step S343. Therefore, in the case of "Yes" in step S343, that is, the winning combination lottery result that is the target of the advantageous section transition lottery. At that time, in the advantageous section transition lottery, the lottery is performed by a lottery table having at least a number of "1" or more. However, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to "1/17500" or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery of step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S347, the advantageous section transition process is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 45, and is a process for setting flags and counters based on the winning of an advantageous section.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
Not limited to the example of the present embodiment, AT may be always started (without performing the AT lottery) when shifting to the advantageous section. Alternatively, when shifting to the advantageous section, the AT may always be set, and after shifting to the advantageous section (for example, after the predetermined number of games has been exhausted), whether or not to execute the AT may be drawn.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition process in step S347 of FIG. 44.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on the advantageous section type flag (“1”). Next, the process proceeds to step S352, and the main control board 50 sets the advantageous section clear counter with the initial value “1500 (D)” of the number of games played in the advantageous section.

In the next step S353, "0" is set in the difference counter. The process of step S353 is not necessary when the difference counter is continuously updated even during the normal section (non-advantageous section), and when it is not an advantageous section and is always set to "0" at the end of the game. However, the initial value "0" may be set to prevent noise or the like.
Since the initialization process including the difference counter is executed at the end of the advantageous section, the difference counter is set to "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of the specification in which the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous section, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous section is “0”, so that the process of step S353 can be omitted. ..
On the other hand, when the difference counter is continuously updated even during the non-advantageous section as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, in step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG. 44.
First, in step S361, the AT lottery is executed based on the combination lottery result. Similar to step S345, this lottery may include an AT lottery using a lottery table in which the number of winnings is determined for each combination lottery result.
The AT lottery does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, a winning combination lottery result that is not determined by the AT and a winning combination lottery result that is always determined by the AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the AT has been won in the AT lottery in step S361. When it is determined that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and when it is determined that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes the AT initial game number determination process. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S364, and the main control board 50 sets the main gaming state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
Here, the main gaming state of the present embodiment includes normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. It is possible to set a precursor as the main game state after the AT is won and before the start of the AT, but in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, when the AT is won, the AT is started immediately. And. Further, the information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that the AT has not been won and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main gaming state to CZ. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial game number determination process in step S363 in FIG. 46.
In FIG. 47, in step S371, it is determined whether or not the winning combination lottery result in this game is a winning combination. As the definite role, as described above, a rare role such as a middle cherry is set. If it is determined that the final winning combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and if it is determined that the fixed winning combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is completed.

In the example of FIG. 47, the initial number of games of the AT is distributed according to whether or not the winning combination is won, but the specification is not limited to this, and the number of games is determined by using the lottery table based on the combination lottery result. You may run a lottery. In other words, even if it is the result of one winning combination lottery, one of a plurality of games may be selected.
Further, even during AT, the AT game count determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an additional lottery for the AT game count. When the additional lottery for the number of AT games is won, the determined number of additional games is added to the AT game count counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not the instruction condition (condition for operating the instruction function) is satisfied. When the game is AT and a winning combination having an advantageous pushing order such as a pushing order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
If the advantageous section is won in the game this time (“Yes” in step S346 in FIG. 44) and the AT is won (in FIG. 46, “Yes” in step S362), the advantageous section from the next game This time the game is not an advantageous section because it shifts to. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be activated in this game, the result is "No" in step S381.
When it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the game this time is "3". In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3" by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM53.
When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for operating the instruction function (performing the process related to the instruction function) is set to be the number of bets "3" (a specified number of one). Therefore, for example, even when the game is started with the number of bets "2" during AT and a winning combination having an advantageous push order (for example, push order bell) is won, the instruction function does not operate (the correct push order is). Not notified).

In the next step S383, the winning number (conditional device number) is set. The winning number (conditional device number) determined in the winning combination lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S384, and the push order instruction number table (not shown) is set. Here, the start address of the push order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S385.

In step S385, the designated address data is set. This process is a process in which the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (condition device number) is used as the offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the start address of the push order instruction number table is acquired. As a result, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (area for storing the push order instruction number, which is not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (pushing order instruction number) is stored as the acquired number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the winning combination to be drawn is the same as that of FIG. 58 (12th embodiment) described later. Then, when the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during AT, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the acquired number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Pushing order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Pushing order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Pushing order instruction number "A6 (H)"

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquired number data by the push order instruction number set process of FIG. 48. As a result, the push order instruction information "= 1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55, which will be described later.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388 to determine whether or not the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether or not the game state (RT or main game state) of the game this time is a game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that whether or not the section Sim ball output rate is in the gaming state exceeding "1" is preset, and here, it is determined whether or not the section Sim is in the preset gaming state. Specifically, the data of the current RT and the main game state is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM53, and by reading this data, the game state of the game this time exceeds the section Sim ball output rate "1". Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the section Sim ball ejection rate is in the gaming state exceeding "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the section Sim ball ejection rate is not in the gaming state exceeding "1", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. To do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt process executed after step S390. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

As described above, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is not yet lit and the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Since the condition that must be turned on is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the player wins the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after shifting to the advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even if the section Sim ball output rate is not in the gaming state exceeding "1", at an arbitrary timing (when the lighting condition set arbitrarily is satisfied). ), The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG. 41.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires the payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of the payout number data in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S392, and it is determined whether or not the medal is paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the payout number data (A register value) is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value is "0", that is, when it is determined that the medal is not paid out, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", that is, when it is determined that the medal is paid out, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the credit number data is acquired.
Next, the process proceeds to step S394, and it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the limit value. Specifically, when the credit number data acquired in step S393 is "50 (D)", it is determined that the credit number has reached the limit value, the process proceeds to step S398, and the acquired credit number data is "50". If it is less than "(D)", it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S395.

In step S395, the waiting time at the time of credit addition is set. In the present embodiment, in order to set the standby time to be about 100 ms, the interrupt processing number “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) is set. Specifically, "00000000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S396, and the 2-byte time wait process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process of step S396 is completed, the process proceeds to step S397, and "1" is added to the value of the credit number data. As a result, the display of the credit number display LED 76 becomes "+1" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S397. For example, the display of the credit number display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process of step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, one medal payout process (process of paying out the actual medal from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. In this process, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and the on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, one medal is correctly paid out. to decide.
By the above processing, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits is the limit, the actual medal is paid out from the hopper 35.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquired number data. As a result, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "+1". For example, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".
In the next step S400, "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S401, and it is determined whether or not the medal payout is completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the updated payout number data is "0". When it is determined that the payout number data is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the payout number data is not "0", the process returns to step S393 and the process is continued.

In the above payout process, when the payout process of adding "1" to the number of credits is performed, the waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. As a result, it is possible to show the player that the display of the credit number display LED 76 counts up. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED76 before credit addition is "08" and eight medals are added to this, "display" 08 "-> 100 ms standby processing->display" 09 "-> 100 ms. Standby process → ... → 100 ms standby process → display “16”. On the other hand, if the waiting time is not provided when the number of credits is "1", it looks as if the display "08" is changed to the display "16" instantly.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when the number of credits is added, the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side by executing the 2-byte time waiting process for each "1" addition ("Purururu ..."") And the count-up of the number of credits can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number "50 (D)" and the medal is actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41.
First, in step S411, a process of clearing a flag of the condition device (also referred to as winning information; stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of RWM53) is performed. This process is a process of clearing other than the special combination condition device, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped at the effective line, the process of clearing the special combination condition device is also executed. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is turned off. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to “0”. Next, the process proceeds to step S413 to clear the replay operation flag. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operating state flag to “0”.

In the next step S414, it is determined whether or not the AT game count counter has become "0". Here, as described above, the AT game count counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main process of FIG. 41. As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated after the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in FIG. 41), but is not limited to this, and for example, in FIG. 41, step S301 (game end). It may be executed before the check process) or within the process of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Further, in the present embodiment, an example of the game number management type AT for updating the AT game count counter is shown, but in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is set to "0" in step S414. Judge whether or not it has become. The AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 41) by winning a prize.
When it is determined that the AT game count counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S415, and when it is determined that the AT game count counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process proceeds to step S416 to execute advantageous section counter management. This process is a process for updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter, and is a process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, which will be described later. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50. FIG. 51 shows Example 1 and FIG. 52 shows Example 2.
In the advantageous interval counter management, the following processing is executed.
1) Update of advantageous section clear counter 2) Update of difference counter 3) Judgment of whether or not the end condition of advantageous section is satisfied 4) Initialization of data related to advantageous section (clear) when the end condition of advantageous section is satisfied )
In addition, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the number of bets (specified number).
In this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section and execute the advantageous section counter management only in the advantageous section.

In Example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
"0010 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F (H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
"0000 (H)"->"1"subtraction->"0000(H)" (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000 (H)", no carry occurs, and the value remains "0000 (H)". In this way, no matter what the value before subtraction is, it is only one instruction (1 step) to subtract "1", so it is judged whether or not the count value before update is "0". Is unnecessary, and the process of adding the carry flag value after subtraction is also unnecessary. Therefore, the time required to update the count value can be significantly reduced. Further, by configuring in this way, it is possible to judge whether or not the player is in the advantageous section from the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, 1500 games in the advantageous section). It is not necessary to judge whether or not the game has been executed, whether or not an arbitrary end condition is satisfied, etc.).

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is “0”. This process is determined by whether or not the carry flag is set to "1" in the subtraction process in step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S436, and when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before subtraction is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S436. The process proceeds to step S424. When the carry flag is "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the game is not in the advantageous section (this time the game is in the non-advantageous section (normal section)). It means that.

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is “0”. This process is determined by whether or not the zero flag is set to "1" in the subtraction process in step S422. That is, it is determined whether or not the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S425. When the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the game of the advantageous section ends in this game (the next game is the game of the non-advantageous section (normal section)). ) Means that.

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S426, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation symbol is displayed in this game (whether or not the replay has won a prize). This process determines whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the replay operation symbol is displayed. When it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S434, and when it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, the payout number data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the payout number data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference counter) and storing the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S429, and the value of the bet number data is acquired. This process is a process of reading the bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value is less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether or not the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1" by the subtraction in step S430, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than "0", and the process proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing the HL register value (setting it to “0”) is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes “0”.
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value. The upper limit of the difference counter is set to "2400 (D)". The processing here is a comparison operation between the HL register value and "2401 (D)". In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag is "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag is "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit value is not exceeded, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value has been exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference counter exceeds the upper limit, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
In step S435, in RWM53, the storage area related to the advantageous section is initialized (data regarding the advantageous section is cleared). Examples of the data related to the advantageous section include an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference number counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, and an AT game count counter. Further, information on the main game state can be mentioned. The information regarding the advantageous section does not include the RT status number, the LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000 (H)" to "F052 (H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Here, it is assumed that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" when the advantageous section ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when it is "00000010 (B)", the LED display counter is normally updated to "00000001 (B)" in the next interrupt process, and the LED. Although it is possible to turn on the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76), the LED display counter becomes "00010000 (B)". Therefore, the display of the LED corresponding to "00000001 (B)" of the LED display counter is delayed, so that the LED display counter may appear to be turned off for a moment.

Further, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED74 (role ratio monitor) (total number of games counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value of minimum game time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Input port 51 information 6) Control command buffer data 7) Stack area data 8) External signal information The above is just an example of typical data, and the data that cannot be cleared is limited to the above data. It does not mean that it will be done.

Next, the process proceeds to step S436, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0” (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", especially when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section) in the present embodiment, the process proceeds to step S437. At this point, the advantageous section type flag is set to "1" because the advantageous section transition lottery was won in this game, and the advantageous section type flag was set to "1" in step S351 in FIG. 45. In this case, a case where "Yes" is determined in step S423 and the process proceeds to step S436 can be mentioned. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous section type flag is cleared in step S435, so that the result is not determined as "No" in step S436.

In step S437, the initial value is set in the advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter. Here, "1500 (D)" is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. In step S421, "F063 (H)" is set in the HL register. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference counter, the number of payouts is first added (step S428), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S430). The reason for processing in this way is as follows.
For example, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", it is assumed that the number of bets is "3 (D)" and the number of payouts is "9 (D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1 (D) (actually," FFFF (H) ")" and the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when the number of payouts is added, "9 (D)" is added to "-1 (D)", so that it becomes "8 (D)" and the carry flag is "1" (carrying is). (Indicates that it will occur).

Since the difference number of games this time is "+6", the carry flag becomes "1" just by adding the difference number "+6" to the difference counter "2 (D)" before the update, which is irregular. The situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined by whether or not the carry flag is "1". If it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes" in step S431 even though the carry flag has not occurred, and the difference counter is initially set in step S432. You will set the value. The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" in any case when carry or carry occurs as a result of subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", when the payout number "9 (D)" is added first, the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that point, and then bets Subtracting the number gives "8 (D)". In this case, the carry flag is "0" because no carry occurs.
For the above reason, when updating the difference counter, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the determination process of step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

Further, in the advantageous section counter management of the present embodiment, the subtraction process (step S422) of the advantageous section counter is first executed, and when the value before subtraction is "0" (when "Yes" in step S423, that is, In the non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the update process of the difference counter (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section, but when it is a non-advantageous section, the difference counter is updated. The processing efficiency is improved by not executing. Therefore, the processing order is such that the subtraction process of the advantageous section clear counter is executed first, and then the update process of the difference counter is performed. Of course, if it is a specification that determines whether or not it is in the advantageous section and executes the subtraction process of the advantageous section clear counter and the update process of the difference counter if it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. It is also possible to execute the update processing of the difference counter before the processing.

Further, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (at the time of winning the replay), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing so, even if an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, it becomes "Yes" in step S434. , The advantageous section can be terminated. On the other hand, when such confirmation is unnecessary, the process of this flowchart may be terminated when "Yes" is obtained in step S426.

Further, in the example of FIG. 51, it is determined in step S426 whether or not the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the difference counter update process (steps S427 to S427). By skipping S430), the processing speed is increased.
In particular, in a game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, it is conceivable that the difference counter is updated by regarding the number of payouts of the game as "0" (deemed payout number) and the number of bets of the next game as "0". .. However, for example, an SB (single bonus) is provided as a winning combination during an advantageous section, and when the SB is won, one SB game in which the number of bets is "1" is executed in the next game, but this SB game In some cases, the replay is won and the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the number of bets is "3" (other than the SB game, the game cannot be played with the number of bets "1"). However, in this case, since the number of deemed payouts in the SB game and the number of bets in the next game do not match, how to count the difference counter becomes a problem.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference counter in the game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes similar to those in FIG. 51.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the number of payouts is first added to the difference counter, and then the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the payout number is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the number of payouts is added after subtracting the number of bets from the difference counter, the carry flag may be set to "1" even if the carry flag does not finally occur, and the calculation result is It was explained that it becomes impossible to judge whether or not it is "0" depending on whether or not the carry flag is "1".
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter (step S430) and then the number of payouts is added (step S428), and in step S441, the carry flag value is not referred to. It is determined whether or not the calculation result is less than "0".
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, among the HL register values, step S441 depends on whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores the upper digit) value is "1". It is determined whether or not the calculation result of is less than "0".

For example
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
Suppose it was.
In this case, the difference counter value after calculation is
0000 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (11111 / 1101 (B))
Will be.
Note that "/" indicates a 4-bit delimiter in binary notation.

The above example is the case where the HL register value before the calculation is "0000 (H)", but the HL register value before the calculation is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference number of this game> HL register". If "value", for example
Difference in number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111/1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
Will be.

Furthermore, when the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference number of games this time <HL register value", for example, first,
Difference in number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (11111 / 1101 (B))
Will be.

Secondly,
Difference in number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
Will be.

Furthermore, thirdly,
Difference in number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after calculation)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
Will be.

On the other hand, the upper limit of the difference counter is "2400 (D)". Here, if "2400 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000 (B)"
Will be.
Since the upper limit of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is judged that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number. The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
At the end of this game, the difference counter value was "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was judged that the end condition of the advantageous section was not satisfied, and it was decided to go to the next game. Suppose you have migrated. Then, in the next game, the difference number increases most when the bet number is "1" and the payout number is "15 (D)", so the difference number in the game is "14 (D)". It becomes.
Therefore, the difference counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, when "2414 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)"
Will be.

Further, when the difference counter value becomes "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so that the difference counter is cleared in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
From the above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
The D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, in the range where the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0 (D)" to "2414 (D)", the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0".

From the above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1" except when the carry is carried down.
In order for the D7 bit of the H register value to be "1", the difference counter value must be "32768 (D)", and the difference reaches such a value except for carry. The advantageous section will not be continued until.

On the other hand, as mentioned above
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
When is, the HL register value after the calculation becomes "FFFD (H)".
Here, "FFFD (H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
Is.

Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
Similarly, before the calculation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
When, the HL register value becomes "FFFF (H)" when the difference counter is updated.

Here, "FFFF (H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
Is.
Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
In this way, when a carry occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference counter, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when no carry has occurred, and the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when the carry has occurred. 1 ".
Therefore, in step S441 of FIG. 52, when determining whether or not the calculation result is less than "0", it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". Then, when the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the calculation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the calculation result is "0" without determining whether or not the carry flag is "1" as a result of the calculation.
Then, since it is determined whether or not the calculation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the number of payouts is added after subtracting the number of bets with respect to the difference counter value.

Further, as is clear from the above, even if the maximum value "2414 (D)" that the difference counter can take is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, the D6 bit, the D5 bit, and the like. The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when the carry of the difference counter value occurs, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value but also the D6 bit, the D5 bit, and the D4 bit become "1".

Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, instead of determining whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether or not the D6 bit is "1". , It may be determined whether or not the D5 bit is "1", and whether or not the D4 bit is "1" may be determined. In any case, when the bit is "1", the calculation result is less than "0", and when the bit is not "1", the calculation result is not less than "0".
As is clear from the above, also in Example 1 (step S431) of FIG. 51, the calculation result is less than "0" with reference to the D7 bit (or D6, D5, or D4 bit) of the H register value. It is also possible to determine if there is.

Further, as is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the update of the advantageous section clear counter (step S422), the update of the difference counter (steps S428 and S430), and whether or not the advantageous section clear counter is "0". The determination (step S424), the determination of whether or not the difference counter has exceeded the upper limit (step S434), and the initialization of the information regarding the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in this game. , Will be executed. Therefore, even if the game is played with the number of bets (specified number) "2" and the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit, the advantageous section ends. To do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 in parallel with the main processing in a period of 2.235 ms (however, the period is not limited to this time period).
When the process shifts to the interrupt processing in step S451, in step S452, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed as initial processing. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing is used in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is because, for example, an interrupt processing execution request may be made during the execution of the power off processing.

In the next step S453, the power cutoff process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process of detecting whether or not a signal of a power failure detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. The interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed can be mentioned.

Next, the process proceeds to step S456, and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process of turning on the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10.
The errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include a non-recoverable error and a recoverable error. In the non-recoverable error, an error display is output by the main process (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but the error can be recovered. The error is displayed by this LED display control for each interrupt process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S457 to read the input port 51. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, the switch signal, and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data based on the input port 51 (level data, rising data, Fall-down data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM53.

In the next step S458, it is determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range. Here, the set value data stored in the address "F000 (H)" is read, and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). ) Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the set value data is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and when it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing. The error in this case is referred to as an "E6" error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In step S459, the built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that turns on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of a random number for a winning combination lottery (when the random number update is slow, etc.) is detected, the error flag is turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S460 to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether or not the error flag is on), and if it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461 and an error occurs. When it is determined that the occurrence has occurred, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error processing. The error display content at this time is "E7".

In step S461, the drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in 31 reel units (left, middle, right), and includes stopping, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S462 to perform port output processing. In this process, the exciting output of the motor 32 (for reels) and the hopper motor 36 and the exciting output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, the input error check process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S464, a control command transmission process is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35)) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the interrupt processing after that point (in principle, if the command buffer is empty, the interrupt processing that comes next to that point in time), this step S464 The control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S465, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S466, the output of the external signal (transmission of the signal to the external centralized terminal plate 100) is performed from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33).
Next, the process proceeds to step S467 to perform the ratio display preparation process. This process is a process of updating the timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputting the segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, the random number update process is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step S469, the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is enabled. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

As shown in the above processing, the credit number display LED76, the acquired number display LED78, the status display LED79 (79a to 79f), the set value display LED73, and the management information display LED74 are turned on / off by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. Be controlled.
Further, for each interrupt process, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during unrecoverable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal recovery).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (data update of RWM53 based on data from an input port, transmission of a control command to the sub control board 80, etc.) is executed. The interrupt itself is prohibited to prevent it from happening.
If an untransmitted command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control commands stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power supply cutoff process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal was turned on in the previous interrupt process. Here, when the voltage becomes a predetermined value or less (V1 or less in the example of FIG. 3) by the voltage monitoring device (power supply disconnection detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50, a predetermined input is made. Since the power failure detection signal is input to the predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal is input. Further, when the power failure detection signal is turned on, it is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM53.
If it is determined in the previous interrupt process that the power cutoff detection signal is on, the process proceeds to step S482, and if it is determined that the signal is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that it is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S483.
When it is determined as "Yes" in both steps S481 and S482 (when a power failure detection signal is input for two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to steps S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. By this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (during the rotation of the reel 31) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (during the payout of medals), the drive is stopped.
Next, the process proceeds to step S484, and the power off processing flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process of storing data indicating that a normal power off process has been executed in the RWM 53.

In the next step S485, the checksum data of RWM53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum including a work area (RWM53) used in the program, and examples of the target program use area include a program work area, an unused area, and a stack area.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum is completed, and if it is determined that the calculation is not completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue the calculation of the checksum. On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculation is completed, the process proceeds to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in the predetermined address of the RWM53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also referred to as complement data) that becomes "0" when all the data in the program used area and the value stored in the predetermined address are added at the checksum of the RWM 53. ).
Then, when the checksum of the RWM53 is executed at the start of the program, all the data of the program use area of the RWM53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data calculated by this is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S488 to enter the reset waiting state. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power supply disconnection detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50. Therefore, in step S488, the state waits for the output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG. 53.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process of outputting "00000000000 (B)" from the output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, the output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. Similar to the above process, this process is also a process of outputting "00000000000 (B)" from the output port 4.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. This process updates the LED display counter bit "1" by shifting it to the right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is "0", and if it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and if it is determined that the LED display counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S496. ..
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, the process of changing the LED display counter "00000000000 (B)" to "00010000 (B)" is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S497 to acquire error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data. Here, in the storage area of the RWM 53, a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs and LED display data indicating on / off of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79 are stored. A storage area and a storage area for storing bet display data indicating on / off of (1 to 3) bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Unused D1: Unused D2: Unused D3: "1" when the game can be started, "0" when the game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay wins, "0" when replay does not win
D6: Unused D7: Unused It should be noted that the D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 32.

The bet display data is configured as follows.
At the time of 0 bet: 00000000
When betting one card: 00000001
When betting two cards: 000000111
When betting 3 cards: 00000111
The D0 to D2 bits of the bet display data correspond to the segments A to C of the state display LED 79 shown in FIG. 32.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Further, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are OR-calculated (combined), and the calculation result is set as segment data for the output port 3. When the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed, the data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is turned on or off is obtained. Then, when there is a display request for digit 5 (when "Yes" in step S516), this segment data is output from the output port 3.
Next, the process proceeds to step S499, and the register for setting the segment data for the output port 4 is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by AND-calculating the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0". To judge. When it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of the present embodiment includes the LED segment table 1 that defines the segment data when displaying the error number, and other than the error number (number of credits, number of payouts, set value,
An LED segment table 2 that defines segment data for displaying the setting changing display, the push order instruction information, and the specified number of instructions) is provided and stored in the used area of the ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the start address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501, the offset and the segment data are defined as follows.
Offset "0": Display segment data "0" Offset "1": Display segment data "1" Offset "2": Display "2" Segment data Offset "3": Display "3" Segment data Offset "4": Display "4" Segment data Offset "5": Display "5" Segment data Offset "6": Display "6" Segment data Offset "7": "7" Segment data to be displayed Offset "8": Display "8" Segment data Offset "9": Display "9" Segment data Offset "A": Display "=" Segment data Offset "B": "A" Segment data to display

For example, first, when the payout number data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the payout number data is "1" and the offset of the lower digit is "0". It becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, the segment data for displaying "1" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, the segment data for displaying "0" is acquired.
Secondly, for example, when the setting changing display data "88 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the setting changing display data is "8", which is the lower digit. The offset of is "8". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, the segment data for displaying "8" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, the segment data for displaying "8" is acquired.

Furthermore, for example, thirdly, when the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number becomes "A", which is the lower digit. The offset is "1". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, the segment data for displaying "=" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, the segment data for displaying "1" is acquired.
Further, for example, fourth, when the indicated specified number display data "0B (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit is "0" and the offset of the lower digit is "B". It becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, the segment data for displaying "0" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, the segment data for displaying "A" is acquired.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and first, the set value data is acquired. Here, the set value data stored in the address "F000 (H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is stored in the A register. This set value display data becomes an offset value when displaying the set value.
As will be described later, the segment data stored in the address (of the LED segment table 1 or 2) obtained by adding the offset value to the start address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is acquired.
Next, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined whether or not there is a request for displaying the set value. Here, D
When the register value is "00010000 (B)" and the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, it is determined that there is a request to display the set value. Then, when it is determined that there is a display request for the set value, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, the credit number data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, the offset for the upper digit is acquired. In this process, the calculation of dividing the credit number data (A register value) acquired in step S504 by "10 (D)" is executed, the quotient value is stored in the A register, and the remainder value is stored in the E register. It is a process.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a request for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digit of the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether or not there is a request for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits. This process determines whether or not the D1 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", determines "Yes" and proceeds to step S513. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digit of the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the acquired number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, in the acquired number data, the payout number data is stored at the timing when the medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination. Further, at the timing when the setting is being changed, the setting changing display data "88 (H)" is stored. Furthermore, when it is time to instruct the specified number, the specified number display data "0B (H)" is stored. Further, the push order instruction number "= x (any of x = 1 to 6)" is stored at the timing when the instruction function is activated (notifying the push order). Then, any one of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not the error is displayed. In this process, the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497) is read, it is determined whether or not it is "0", and if it is not "0", it is determined that an error is displayed and step S510. If it is "0", it is determined that the error is not displayed, and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for displaying an error is set. The specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 will not be described. In step S510, a process of storing the start address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register is executed. Therefore, in this case, the start address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the start address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, the offset for the upper digit is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), the operation of dividing the B register value by "10 (D)" is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is obtained. Is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when the error is not displayed (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting changing display data, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to "10 (" The operation of dividing by "D)" is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

Proceeding to step S513, the offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit value and the lower digit value are exchanged in the A register and the E register. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is acquired. This process adds the data stored in the HL register (the start address of the LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data stored in the A register (offset value), and corresponds to the added address (LED segment). This is a process of storing the segment data (of Table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, the segment data for the output port 4 is set. The data set here is the segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since the digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process (step S522) described later, the segment data of the digits 1b to 4b are not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, “Yes” (with a setting value display request) is set in step S503, and when the segment data for displaying the set value is acquired in step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, the process proceeds to step S516, and it is determined whether or not there is a display request for digit 5. Here, the display request for digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". If it is determined that there is a display request for digit 5, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that there is no display request for digit 5, the process proceeds to step S517.

In step S517, the segment data for the output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as the segment data for the output port 3. When "Yes" is set in step S516 (when there is a display request for digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for the output port 3.

In the next step S518, the data of the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value is “0”. When the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether or not the digit lit by the interrupt processing this time is the digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that the digit 4a is lit. In this case, the segment data set in step S517 and the data obtained by ORing "10000000" are set as the segment data for the output port 3. As a result, data that can turn on the segment P (advantageous section display LED77) of the digit 4a is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S519, and the segment data for the output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) from being turned on when there is no display request for the digit 5 (when "No" is set in step S516).
Then, the process proceeds to step S520, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment signal is output from the output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as the digit data of the output port 2 and output from the output port 2.
The segment signal data output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when the digits 5 are lit) or the data set in step S517 (when the digits 1 to 4 are lit).

Next, the process proceeds to step S521, and the segment signal is output from the output port 4. The segment signal data output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a set value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no set value display request). In other words, when the segment data for the output port 4 is cleared in step S519, "0000000000 (B)" is output from the output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522, and the process proceeds to the ratio display process (process for turning on the management information display LED 74). In this embodiment, the description of the ratio display process will be omitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous section display LED 77 and the power off (when the power off occurs while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit) will be described.
In the interrupt process, if a power failure is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to the process of step S483 and subsequent steps. In this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power is turned off.
Then, after the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is off, it is determined as "No" in step S208. Therefore, if the power off / return is normal, the step Proceed to the power supply cutoff / recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) of S213.

In the power supply cutoff / recovery process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM53 is set in step S253, and this range is an unused area of the RWM53 as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag of the address “F062 (H)” is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter at the address "F051 (H)".

In the power supply cutoff / recovery process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, after step S262, the interrupt processing of FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55. Further, the time of "No" in step S512 is the time when there is a display request for the digit 4a. In this case, when the error is not displayed (“No” in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to “1” in step S518, and the segment is set to “1”. Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on again when the interrupt process is executed in the power off / return process.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on after the power is turned off, the result is as follows.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, it becomes “Yes” in step S208, and the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous section display LED flag of the address “F062 (H)”. When it is determined that the power supply / disconnection / recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM53 (including the address “F062 (H)”) is initialized.

Therefore, by initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, even if "1" indicating lighting is stored up to that point, it becomes "0" indicating turning off.
After that, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interrupt is activated, in the LED display control (FIG. 55), the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 when the lighting timing of the set value display LED 73 comes. Then, in FIG. 39, when the process proceeds to step S240, the set value can be changed (the set value is changed when the setting change switch is turned on).

Further, in FIG. 39, when the interrupt process is activated in step S233 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is already "" even when the lighting timing of the digit 4a is reached. Since it is "0", the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on and the process shifts to the setting change process, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Further, even if the setting change process is completed and the process shifts to the main process, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

Further, in the main process of FIG. 41, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and the power is cut off during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, during the rotation of the reel 31, the following occurs. ..
When a power failure is detected in the interrupt process, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54, so that the drive signal of the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops when the power is cut off.

Next, when the power is supplied, the state before the power is turned off is restored through the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the same drive signal of the motor 32 as before the power was cut off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal of the motor 32 before the power is turned off is a signal for maintaining a constant speed state. In the present embodiment, in the constant speed state of the motor 32 (reel 31), one interrupt (2.235 ms) is used for one-step drive. However, even if a drive signal in a constant speed state is output to the motor 32 after the drive is stopped, the rotation torque is weak and the motor 32 cannot be driven.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (does not cut the index). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is reaccelerated (restarted). The acceleration of the motor 32 is, for example, first 20 interrupts (20 × 2.235 = 44.7 ms) for 1 step drive, then 16 interrupts for 1 step drive, then 12 interrupts for 1 step drive, and so on. It is a method of gradually driving one step in a short time. The accelerated state requires, for example, about 100 steps. As a result, the rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and the interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, the digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter, but the first LED display counter after the interrupt is activated is the digit. When the value for lighting 3a (“00000100 (B)” in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes “00001000 (B)” after 4 interrupts from that point, and the digit 4a (advantageous section display LED77) is lit. The timing is coming.

On the other hand, the power is cut off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in the remaining "1" to several steps), and after the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and re-acceleration is performed, as described above, at least several tens of interruptions are required before the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches the constant speed state. It takes.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 is in the constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. That is, when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

Further, when the reel 31 is stopped at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are interrupted after the interrupt is activated until the reel sensor 33 determines that the index of the reel 31 is not detected. Needs. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the motor 32 is reaccelerated.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up after the reel 31 rerotates and returns to the constant speed state after returning from the power failure.

Further, in the main process of FIG. 41, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and when the power is cut off while the hopper motor 36 is being driven in the medal payout process by winning in step S294, the following occurs. .. As described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process by winning a prize shown in FIG. 49, in step S398, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detects the movable piece 39a as shown in FIG. 7 (in FIG. 8). , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. Then, the hopper motor 36 continues to drive until it is determined that medals corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out have been paid out.
If a power failure is detected in the interrupt process before all medals are paid out during the payout of medals, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54, so that the hopper motor 36 The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when the power is supplied, the process returns to step S294 (medal payout process by winning a prize) of the main process (FIG. 41) through the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was cut off. As shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process by winning in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power failure, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous section display LED77) arrives within 4 interrupts as described above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal cannot be unconditionally stated, but it takes about 100 ms. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before returning to the medal payout process by winning from the power off and before paying out the remaining medals. In other words, when the medal payout process for winning a prize is completed after returning from the power failure, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that time.

Further, as a method of preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from being turned off for a moment when the power supply is momentarily interrupted, the following method can be mentioned.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power failure is detected, the outputs of all the ports 52 are turned off in step S483. Therefore, after this process, the digit signal from the output port 2 and the segment signal from the output port 3 are turned off. Is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is the segment P of the digit 4a, is turned off.

Therefore, after proceeding to step S488 of FIG. 54 and waiting for a reset, when the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, an ON signal of D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2 and the ON signal is output. It is possible to output a D7 bit (segment P) on signal from the output port 3. In FIG. 54, the interrupt processing does not occur in the loop processing after proceeding to step S488 and waiting for the reset, so that the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is always lit (static lighting). As a result, even if a momentary interruption occurs, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be apparently prevented from turning off.
Alternatively, in FIG. 54, in the process of step S483, the output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but the other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be prevented from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In the present embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set to the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. Then, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically turned on and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when a power failure is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 is prevented from being turned off at the time of a momentary interruption. can do.

Next, the difference number display on the sub control board 80 side will be described. The sub-control board 80 displays the difference number of images on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 is provided with the following storage area.
Provides the following:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Pullback game count counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to each game and AT flag on / off to the sub control board 80. The command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side is changed from off to on and when the AT flag is changed from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives the ON / OFF information of the AT flag from the main control board 50, and turns on / off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side is turned from off to on (AT flag rising data) and that it is turned off from on (AT flag falling data). ..

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game count counter every game during AT, and ends AT when the AT game count counter becomes “0”. Further, when the difference counter becomes "2400 (D)" or the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", AT (and the advantageous section) is terminated.
Since the main control board 50 executes the initialization process of the difference counter when the AT and the advantageous section are ended, the difference counter becomes "0" when the next game shifts to the normal section.

On the other hand, the sub control board 80 includes a sub difference number counter that counts the difference number during AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" at the start of AT (except when the AT is won and the AT is started during the pullback period described later), and after that, the difference number is updated every game. When a carry is generated, unlike the difference counter of the main control board 50, the carry is not corrected to "0", and the carry is left as it is.

For example, when AT is started
1st game: No role won (difference number "-3")
2nd game: No role won (difference number "-3")
3rd game: Winning the push order bell (difference number "+5")
4th game: No role won (difference number "-3")
5th game: Winning of push order bell (difference number "+5")
Suppose it was.
In this case, the sub-difference number counter (2-byte counter) is
1st game: 0 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
2nd game: FFFD (H) -3 (H) = FFFA (H)
Third game: FFFA (H) +5 (H) = FFFF (H)
4th game: FFFF (H) -3 (H) = FFFC (H)
5th game: FFFC (H) + 5 (H) = 0001 (H)
Will be updated.

When the replay is won, the sub-difference number counter is not updated like the difference counter. Not limited to this, in the game at the time of winning the replay, the number of payouts may be set to "0" and the number of bets in the next game (at the time of replay) may be set to "0" to calculate the number of sub-differences.
Further, as described above, the difference counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when the advantageous section ends, but the sub difference number counter of the sub control means 80 sets AT (advantageous section). Even if it ends, there is a case where the initialization process is not executed immediately and the counting does not stop. The sub control board 80 turns on the pullback flag (“1”) when the AT is terminated and the count of the sub difference number counter is continued.

The sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value at the end of AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub difference number counter. Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds (or is greater than or equal to) the predetermined value, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. When the sub-difference number counter approaches the upper limit and the AT ends, when the AT is pulled back, the sub-difference counter value may reach the upper limit immediately. In such a case, , Do not take over the difference number to the next AT.

The pullback flag is a flag for determining whether or not the AT has been pulled back (whether or not it has been re-winned) within a predetermined number of games (“50” games in the present embodiment) after the end of the AT.
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and "50 (D)" is set in the pullback game count counter. The pullback game count counter is for counting the number of games (during the pullback period) after the end of AT. At the end of the AT, "50 (D)" is set in the pullback game count counter, and after that, if the AT is not won, "1" is continuously subtracted for each game. Then, when the pullback game count counter becomes "0", the AT pullback fails, the pullback flag is turned off, and the sub difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
Then, the sub control board 80 updates the sub difference number counter when the pullback flag is on after the end of AT.

In addition, when a special role such as BB is won and a special game such as a BB game is executed during the pullback period (when the pullback flag is on), the pullback game count counter is subtracted (updated) during the special game. )do not do.
On the other hand, if the AT is won before the pullback game count counter becomes "0", the AT is successfully pulled back, and in the subsequent AT, the number of sheets inheriting the difference number of the previous AT is displayed as an image.
For example
Difference number of sheets in the first AT: +1000 sheets Difference number of sheets from the end of the first AT to winning the second AT: -100 sheets, the difference number of sheets at the start of the second AT is "+900 sheets" The image is displayed.

In addition, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub-difference number counter is set. In this embodiment, it is set as follows.
1) Upper limit during AT: 2414 (D)
2) The upper limit value when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped during AT and the number of sheets (expected difference number) that can be acquired in the special game related to the special role is "250 (D)": "2414 (D) ) -250 (D) = 2164 (D) "
3) Upper limit during the withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during AT, the counting of more sub-difference sheets is stopped and the sub-difference number counter is cleared.
In the present embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 are linked (matched). For example, when the sub-difference number counter becomes "1000 (D)" during AT, an image is displayed on the image display device 23 as "Number acquired during AT: 1000".

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", AT (and the advantageous section) is terminated. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, with respect to the sub-difference number counter on the sub-control board 80 side, the maximum value that can be counted is set to "2414 (D)" according to the difference counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub-difference number counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is "2414". As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive difference in the number of images from being displayed, and to prevent an image display that significantly arouses gambling.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (9th embodiment), when the number of cards that can be acquired in the BB game is 250, the BB is won during AT and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is used. When is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter value at that time is determined. Then, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-mentioned "2164 (D)", it exceeds "2414 (D)" at the end of the BB game, so that the sub-difference occurs when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed. Clear the number counter (2 above)).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays images such as "Congratulations" and "Congratulations" as image displays corresponding to the difference in the number of images. In this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" or the like from the start of the BB game, the sub difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference number is exceeded until "2414 (D)" is exceeded. The counter may be continuously counted, and when "2414 (D)" is exceeded, the sub-difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, the difference may increase during the pullback period. For example, the difference counter value may increase as a result of winning a special role during the pullback period and digesting the special game.
In particular, if the specification is such that the AT is won when a specific BB is won, the game shifts to the AT after the end of the BB game. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, the upper limit value is reached immediately even if the difference number is taken over by the AT after the end of the BB game. Therefore, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the pullback period, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. For example, if the BB with AT is won during the AT pullback period and the BB game is digested, and the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final game of the BB game, Clear the sub-difference number counter. As a result, in the AT after the end of BB, the display of the difference number is started from "0".

As described above, even if the game shifts to the special game during the pullback period, the pullback game number counter is not subtracted during the special game. Then, when the special combination is won during the pullback period, the update of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or interrupted during the special game. As an example of interrupting the update, for example, when the BB with AT is won when the sub difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1000 (D)", the sub difference number counter value is set to "1000 (D)". Stop at. Then, even if "250" cards are acquired in the subsequent BB game, these "250" cards are not added to the sub-difference number counter. Therefore, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number starts from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1000 (D)", the BB with AT is won, and in the subsequent BB game, " When "250" is acquired, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "1250 (D)". Then, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number starts from "1250".
Further, in the case of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1800 (D)", the BB with AT is won, and in the subsequent BB game, "250". When the number of cards is acquired, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)", which exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub-difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and in the AT after the end of the BB, the display of the difference number starts from "0".

Further, the sub-difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets, but in the present embodiment, the difference of the game is limited to when the game is started with a predetermined number. Update the number of sheets.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets in the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is determined to be when the number of bets (specified number) is "3", and when the game is started with the number of bets (specified number) "2". Does not update the difference number in that game.

Next, the sub-difference number counter management process will be described with reference to a flowchart.
56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the sub-difference number counter management process according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG. 56.
In step S531 of FIG. 56, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (whether or not it is currently in AT). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends. That is, when non-AT is in progress and the pullback flag is off, the sub-difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the bet number of the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command capable of determining the bet number of the game to the sub control board 80. When it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) is "3" based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-difference number counter is updated only when the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or the withdrawal period, when the number of bets is other than "3", the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the number of bets (“3”) from the sub difference number counter. Next, the process proceeds to step S536, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, after the display determination is performed in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command capable of determining the number of payouts to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined that the payout command has been received in step S536, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub control board 80 adds the payout number to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. 57.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is turned on in this game (whether or not the rise of the AT flag is turned on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on (the rise of the AT flag is off) in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process from step S539 to step S543 is performed at the time of AT from before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. For example, when the AT flag is turned on (“Yes” in step S539) and the pullback flag is off (“No” in step S540, that is, when the pullback period is not in progress) in this game, the number of sub-differences is at this point. Since the counter is "0", it is not necessary to update the sub-difference number counter, so the process according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. In the next step S542, the sub control board 80 clears the pullback game count counter. Here, when "Yes" in step S539 and "Yes" in step S540, it corresponds to the case where the AT is won during the pullback period. Therefore, in this case, the pullback flag is turned off and the pullback game count counter is cleared.
Next, the process proceeds to step S543, and the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value “2414 (D)”. When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. This may occur when the difference number increases during the pullback period after the end of AT and the sub difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, in step S543, when it is determined that the sub difference number counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub control board 80 stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to BB in this game. Judge whether or not. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
"Yes" in step S544 is when the BB with AT is won during the pullback period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed in the game in which the BB is won.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped and displayed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546, the sub-difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the process according to this flowchart is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S545 that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)", the process according to this flowchart ends (maintaining the sub-difference number counter value).

As described above, when the BB game of the present embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 cards as shown in FIG. 26 (9th embodiment), the sub-difference number counter is set to "2164 (D)" at the start of the BB game. If it exceeds, it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit value) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, at the start of the BB game (before the start), it is determined whether or not the sub-difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game, and when it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded, the BB game is played. The sub-difference number counter is cleared before the start. Since the difference number of images displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub-difference number counter, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference is displayed in the BB game after the sub-difference number counter is cleared. Instead of displaying the number of sheets, for example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed.

When it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on and the process proceeds to step S547 of FIG. 57, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is turned off in this game (whether or not the fall of the AT flag is on). That is, whether or not the AT has ended in this game) is determined. If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned off in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S548, and if it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned off in the game this time (the fall of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S551. ..

In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S550, and the sub control board 80 sets the initial value “50 (D)” in the pullback game count counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
When the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT by the above steps S548 to S550, the pullback flag is turned on and the initial value of the number of pullback games is "50 (D)". To set. The reason why "50 (D)" is set as the initial value of the number of pullback games is that the AT pullback within 50 games is set as the continuous AT (condition for passing the sub-difference number to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pullback games is not limited to "50 (D)" but can be set variously such as "30 (D)" and "100 (D)" according to the specifications.
Further, if the sub-difference number counter is "2000 (D)" or more at the end of AT, even if the AT is pulled back after that, the sub-difference number counter may exceed the upper limit value during the AT after pulling back. Is high, so in such a case, the pullback flag is not set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. In other words, when the sub-difference number counter is "2000 (D)" or more at the end of AT, the sub-difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the process shifts to AT thereafter.

Further, when proceeding from step S547 to step S551, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the game is operating BB (during BB game) this time. The information on the operating state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not operating, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S553, the pullback game count counter is subtracted by "1". In other words, during the pullback period, when the BB is operating (during the BB game), the pullback game count counter is not updated (subtracted). Not limited to this, the pullback game count counter may be subtracted even during the BB game during the pullback period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback game count counter has become “0”. When it is determined that the pullback game count counter is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback game count counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S555.

In step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pullback game count counter is cleared. When "Yes" in step S554, the pullback game count counter is "0", so the process of clearing the pullback game count counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, when the result is "No" in step S560, which will be described later, the pullback game count counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, the process proceeds to step S557, and the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game count counter is "0" (clear), the sub difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and then "0" is set until AT starts. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is operating and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the game this time is the final game during the BB operation (BB game). Whether or not it is the final game of the BB game may be determined by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the sub control board 80 side, or is transmitted from the main control board 50. You may make a judgment based on the command that comes.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S560, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S561 and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. As a result, the BB game is executed when the pullback flag is on, and when the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, the pullback period (50 games) from the next game is performed again. ) Will be newly set. That is, when the number of pullback games is set to the initial value "50" after the end of AT, the BB game is executed during the pullback period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game. , The number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S555. In step S555 and later, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game count counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the withdrawal period. In this way, in the final game of the BB game, when the pullback period is in progress, the number of sub differences at that time is determined, and when the number of sub differences is "2000 (D)" or more, the pullback period ends. ..

In the above sub-difference number counter management, the sub-difference number counter is updated at the timing when the bet command is received. That is, the number of sub-differences is updated before all reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, since the difference counter is executed by the advantageous section counter management of the game end check process, the subtraction of the number of bets is also executed after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, as for the sub-difference number counter, the subtraction of the bet number and the addition of the payout number may be executed after all the reels 31 are stopped, as in the difference counter.

Further, the sub-difference number counter stores the value (carried value) even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if a carry occurs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the difference number counter, when the sub difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a carry occurs), it may be corrected to "0".
Furthermore, even if the specifications are such that the sub-difference number counter may be negative, the difference number "0" is displayed on the image display device 23.

In this case, processing can be described as follows.
As described above, the sub-difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit is "2414 (D)", that is, "096E (H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)". Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a carry has occurred by determining whether or not the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)". Then, when it is determined that a carry has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 may be set to "0".

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)) can be similarly applied. The sub-bonus sets the number of games, the number of payouts, or the difference number as the end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus symbol has been stopped and displayed. Further, in step S551, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus game is in progress. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the sub-bonus game.

<12th Embodiment>
Subsequently, the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined number (number of bets) is instructed before the start of the game.
The display of the push order instruction information is the operation of the instruction function (process related to the instruction function). Here, the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning a prize. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not the operation of the instruction function (process related to the instruction function). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specified number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a bonus condition device, a specified number for each RT, and a winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58 (A), BB1 and BB2 are provided as accessory condition devices (special combinations). When the BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB1 is stopped, the game shifts to the BB1 game. The BB1 game ends with a payout of more than 100 cards. After the end of the BB1 game, it shifts to non-RT.
Further, when the BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 is stopped, the game shifts to the BB2 game. The BB2 game ends with a payout of more than 30 cards. After the end of the BB2 game, it shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, during BB1 operation, and during BB2 operation.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 is elected. If you win BB1 in non-RT, you will move to the inside of BB1, and if you win BB2, you will move to inside BB2.
Inside the BB1, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB1 continues until the stop display is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped inside the BB1, the game shifts to the BB1 operation, that is, the BB1 game. Similarly, inside the BB2, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 continues until the stop display is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped inside the BB2, the game shifts to the BB2 operation, that is, the BB2 game.
In addition, the special role that can carry over the winning is limited to one. Therefore, BB2 is not won when it is inside BB1. Similarly, when inside BB2, BB1 is not won.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the specified number is limited to "3" during BB1 operation and BB2 operation (when the accessory is operating). The game cannot be started with the number of bets "1" or "2".
On the other hand, the specified number in the non-RT, inside the BB1 and inside the BB2 when the accessory is not operating is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58 (C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of the winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". In addition, the advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the number of advantageous section lottery is "16384", it means that the advantageous section is won with a probability of "16384/16384".
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), in the non-RT, BB2 is drawn by the specified number "2", but BB1 is not drawn. On the contrary, when the specified number is "3", BB1 is drawn but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the non-RT specified number "3" or the specified number "3" inside the BB2, the lottery of the advantageous section is possible. Then, in the lottery of the advantageous section, it is set so that the advantageous section is always won except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, the game section can be made a substantially advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment is the above-mentioned "7P" type specification.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game proceeds inside the BB2 and in the specified number "3". Then, an AT is drawn inside the BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2, which has carried over the winning, will not be awarded.
For example, if it is non-RT at the present time, it is necessary to move from non-RT to inside BB2 (winning BB2 in non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play a game with a specified number "2".
Therefore, in the case of non-RT at the present time, the game is played with the specified number "2" to win the BB2, and the game is transferred to the inside of the BB2 from the next game. Further, since the lottery for the advantageous section inside the BB2 is received when the specified number is "3", the game proceeds with the specified number "3" inside the BB2.

Further, the BB2 won by the specified number "2" cannot stop and display the symbol combination unless the specified number is "2". Similarly, the BB1 won by the specified number "3" cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the valid line unless the specified number is "3".
Therefore, when the player wins BB2 with the specified number "2" in non-RT, shifts to the inside of BB2, and proceeds with the game with the specified number "3", BB2 even when the winning combination is not won. The symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed on the effective line.
As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the special role is not a specification for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role and shifting to the special game and increasing the medals in the special game, but the special role is for carrying over the winning. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58 (C), in the non-RT, since the BB2 can be won with a probability of about "1/5", it is possible to move from the non-RT to the inside of the BB2 at an early stage.
In addition, inside BB2, when a small role or a replay is won, there is a 100% probability that the advantageous section will be won. Therefore, in the inside of BB2, most of the game period is an advantageous section. Of course, it is also possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous section to less than 100%.

Further, the instruction function can be activated (the process related to the instruction function is executed) only when the game is played with one specified number, particularly the specified number "3" in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the AT is won during the advantageous section inside the BB2 and the AT is executed, when the game is started with the specified number "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated. , The push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (number of bets) "2" during AT, the instruction function is not activated even when the push order bell is won.

Further, as in the eleventh embodiment, even when the game is played with the specified number "2" during AT, the difference counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game, and the difference counter is updated. Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game count counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) is not updated. On the other hand, when the game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the difference counter, the advantageous section clear counter, and the AT game count counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) Update about everything.
In addition, regardless of the specified number, RT is always transferred when the transition condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination satisfying the transition condition is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, regarding the main game state (usually, CZ, AT, etc.), any specified number may be set so that the game can be transferred, or the game is played with one specified number (for example, "3"). It may be set so that it can be migrated only when it is used.

Inside the BB2, if the player starts the game with the specified number "2" due to an operation error and the winning combination is not won in the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 carrying over the winning can be stopped and displayed. It becomes. On the other hand, if a player starts a game with a specified number of "2" due to an operation error and wins one of the winning combinations in the game, the winning combination in the game is prioritized. The symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that has won is not stopped and displayed. However, when the replay is won in the game, the next game will also be played with the number of bets "2", so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning BB2 will be stopped and displayed in the next game as well. there is a possibility.

If the game is started inside the BB2 and at the AT with the specified number "2" and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game is completed, the game shifts to non-RT (AT). Then, in this non-RT, the information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the player is notified that the game should be performed with the specified number "2" (instruction of the specified number). .. This is because the game is played with the specified number "2", the BB2 is won, and the game is transferred to the inside of the BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the specified number "2" is instructed until BB2 is won.

As described above, when the information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. The instruction of the specified number "2" is not limited to "0A", and is not confused with any of the number of payouts, the setting changing display "88", the error number, and the push order instruction information. It may be. For example, since the maximum number of medals displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number "2".

Further, in the present embodiment, the specified number is specified only during AT, and the specified number is not specified during non-AT. For example, in the case of shifting to non-RT after the end of the BB2 game, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not specified. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play the game by himself / herself with the specified number "2" and transfer the game to the inside of the BB2.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of non-RT and non-advantageous section, if the game is played with the specified number "3" and the small winning combination or replay is won, the advantageous section is also won. Then, when it becomes a non-RT and advantageous section, the specified number "2" may be instructed (even if it is non-AT).
Further, not limited to the above, when shifting to non-RT, the specified number "2" may be instructed regardless of AT / non-AT and advantageous section / non-advantageous section.

Further, in the non-RT, when the player sets the bet number to "2", the specified number may not be specified, and when the player sets the bet number to "3", the specified number may be specified. In the main process of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined by the medal management process of step S276, but when it is determined that the current number of bets is "2", the specified number "2" is not specified. (Perform the clearing process of the acquired number data), and when the current bet number is "3", the specified number "2" can be instructed (the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data). Can be mentioned.

Further, when the BB2 game is ended and the transition to the non-RT is performed, the wait process may be executed at the end of the final game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot proceed (the main process shown in FIG. 41). Therefore, after the wait process is completed, the process proceeds to the game start set process of the next game (non-RT), and the specified number is instructed there.

In non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, it may be completed in one game, or it may be performed in a plurality of games.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the game is played with the specified number "2" in the non-RT, the replay (normal replay, watermelon play, cherry replay) may be won. When the replay is won as a result of playing the game with the specified number "2", it is optional whether or not to instruct the specified number "2" in the next game. In non-RT and AT, the specified number "2" may be instructed before the start of the game, regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped, until the BB2 is won. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (number of bets) in the next game (re-game), so do not specify the specified number in that game. It may be.

This is the same even when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed as a result of playing the game with the specified number "3" in, for example, non-RT and AT. In the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (number of bets), so that the specified number may not be specified in this case as well. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the specified number "2" may be instructed for the purpose of calling attention.
In non-RT and AT, when the game is played with the specified number "2", BB2 is won, and the game shifts to the inside of BB2 from the next game, after that, unless it shifts to non-RT again, the specified number of instructions is given. Do not do.

Further, the timing for instructing the specified number is after all the reels 31 are stopped, and after the payout process is completed when there is a payout based on the winning of a small winning combination, and the start switch 41 of the next game is operated. Before (for example, before the medal can be bet (before the bet is accepted)). Therefore, after the final game of the BB2 game is paid out based on the winning of a small winning combination, the specified number "2" is instructed before the start of the next game (non-RT) game. As shown in FIG. 42 (11th embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets a specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. Judge to meet.

Then, when it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the specified number of instruction conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and "0B" is displayed in the acquired number data as the instruction specified number display data corresponding to the instruction specified number "2". (H) ”is memorized.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of turning on the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the upper digit in step S511 of the indicated specified number display data “0B (H)”. The offset “0 (H)” is acquired, and the segment data for displaying “0” is acquired based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. When this segment data is output from the output port 3 in step S520, “0” is displayed in the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Further, at the timing of turning on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the lower digit offset “B (H)” is acquired in step S513 of the indicated specified number display data “0B (H)”. In step S514, segment data for displaying "A" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. When this segment data is output from the output port 3 in step S520, “A” is displayed on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start set process in step S272 is a process before the bet is possible and before the start switch 41 is operated, so that the bet is possible and the start is started. Before the switch 41 is operated, the specified number of instructions is displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42, after storing the indicated specified number display data as the acquired number data in step S322, the automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when the specified number is specified in the next game at the time of winning the replay, the specified number is specified before the automatic bet is made. As a result, the player can be instructed to the specified number as soon as possible.
Further, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquired number data (instruction specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing after step S280, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, the information "0A" corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the specified number "2", the instruction function is activated even during AT. It doesn't work. That is, even when the push order bell is won in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This is because, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the specified number "3". Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information "0A" corresponding to the specified specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number display LED 78 is at least until all reels 31 are stopped. The display of is "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the game is played with the specified number "3" and the push order bell is won. When this is done, the push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. 41. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in this case displays the information "0A" corresponding to the specified specified number "2" before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the specified number "3"), " After displaying "00", if the push order bell is won, push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") is displayed.

Further, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. 41. Since the acquired number data is cleared in step S280 after the operation of the start switch 41, the process of step S290 may be skipped in the game in which the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Then, when the small winning combination wins and the medal payout process by winning is executed in step S294, the winning number data is added by "1", so that the winning number display LED 78 displays the payout number accordingly. To.

Then, when proceeding to the game start set process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, the specified number of instructions display data is stored as the acquired number data, but at this point, the payout number data of the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, the process of clearing the acquired number data may be executed before storing the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions. For example, in FIG. 42, a process of clearing the acquired number data may be executed before step S311.

In AT and non-RT, even though the specified number "2" was instructed, the game was executed with the specified number "3", the BB1 was elected, and the game was transferred to the inside of the BB1. Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute the BB1 game.
In order to suppress such an action, for example, it is possible not to execute the process related to the instruction function inside the BB1. In addition, the BB1 game may be set so that the payout rate is less than "1" so that the number of medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
It should be noted that since the player is free to decide which specified number to play, even if the specified number "3" is used in the game in which the specified number "2" is specified in AT and non-RT, the game is played. No penalty is imposed on the person.

In the above example, when the specified number is specified, the specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number is acquired. In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the specified number of instructions may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub control board 80 side).
Here, it is mentioned that the display start timing when the indicated specified number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is set to be substantially the same as the display start timing (before the start of the game) in which the indicated specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Be done.
Further, the display end timing after displaying the indicated specified number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the display end timing after displaying the indicated specified number on the acquired number display LED 78.
The display end timing after displaying the specified number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in the specified number "2" game (4) All reels in the specified number "2" game When 31 is stopped (5) After winning BB2 in a game with a specified number of "2" (6) When all reels 31 are stopped in a game with a specified number of "2" and winning in BB2.
Further, when the specified number of instructions is displayed on the dedicated display, it is possible to continue displaying the specified number of instructions on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<13th Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three.
On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are four each.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an outline of the configuration including the reels 31 (31A to 31D) and the stop switches 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are shown so as to be visible without being blocked by the front surface of the front door 12. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown so as to be visible. Further, in the right side view, the medal insertion slot 47 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front surface of the front door 12, and an operation button 24 and a medal insertion slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Further, although the operation button 24 is not shown in FIG. 1, it is electrically connected to the sub control board 80, and bidirectional communication with the sub control board 80 is possible. For example, at least a part of the operation button 24 is formed so as to be lit, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by controlling the sub-control board 80. When the operation button 24 is operated, the signal is input to the sub control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, the vertical line passing through the intermediate points of the four reels 31A to 31D is defined as the line L1 (center line). Line L1 is at an intermediate position between reels 31B and 31C. The space between the reels 31A and 31B, the space between the reels 31B and 31C, and the space between the reels 31C and 31D are all W1 (uniform). Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged symmetrically with respect to the line L1.
Also, regarding the four stop switches 42A to 42D, W2 (uniform) is used between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D. Then, the line L1 is arranged so as to pass through the intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

Further, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2 = W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2> W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2 <W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, the vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is the line L2, and the vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is the line L3.
And. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (closer to the center) than the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L3.

Further, in the front view, assuming that the distance between the reels 31 (distance between centers) is W3, the distance between the reels 31A and 31B, the space between the reels 31B and 31C, and the space between the reels 31C and 31D are all W3 (constant). Is.
If the distance between the stop switches 42 (distance between centers) is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D are all W4 (constant). ).

Further, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged so as to intersect the line L2. However, not limited to this, the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged on the left side (outer side) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or the line L2 does not intersect the line L2. It may be placed on the right side (closer to the center) of.
Further, in the front view, the medal insertion slot 47 is arranged so that the medal insertion slot 47 and the line L4 intersect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the medal insertion slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outer side) of the line L4 so as not to intersect the line L4. Alternatively, the medal insertion slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed horizontally long, and the line in contact with the left end of the operation button 24 is referred to as line L4, and the line in contact with the right end of the operation button 24 is referred to as line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a part of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

Further, as shown in the plan view, the index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed of engraving, printing, or the like, and in the example of FIG. 59, it has the shape of an arrow pointing toward the stop switch 42 side. Further, the index 12d on the left side is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it does not matter if it deviates slightly from the center line). Further, the index 12d on the right side is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it does not matter if it deviates slightly from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A with the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated with the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A with the index 12d on the left side as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated with the index 12d on the right side as a guide.

When the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three, as shown in FIG. 58 (12th embodiment), a maximum push order of "3! = 6" can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, it is possible to provide a push order of "4! = 24" at the maximum.
The larger the number of push orders of the stop switch 42, the more the base during non-AT (when the accessory is not operating and during non-AT, it means the number of outs per 100 ins. For example, for 100 ins. If the number of outs is 50, the base is 50.) Can be lowered.

When the number of reels 31 and the stop switch 42 is 4, the push order bells to be drawn are 1234 bells (stop switches 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicate the correct push order), 1243 bells, and so on. There are 24 types of bells, 4312 bells and 4321 bells. Then, as shown in FIG. 58, if the number of winnings of each push order bell is the same, the number of winnings of each push order bell may be set to "1500". In this way, the number of winnings of each push order bell can be set to "1/4", so that the probability that the push order operated by the player matches the correct push order at the time of winning the push order bell is low. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 is 3, the image can be displayed as "123" or "left middle right" during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the correct answer pressing order.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is 4, the following method can be mentioned as to how to notify the correct answer pressing order during AT.

For example, as a first method, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated is notified. Be done. For example, when the stop switch 42 is pressed in the order of the stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, it is notified as "3412" (at least one of image display, voice display, and lamp color notification). ). Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "A", "B", "C", and "D", respectively, and in the above example, they are notified as "CDAB".

Further, as a second method, the base of the reel 31 and / or the stop switch 42 may be colored for identification.
For example, the color of the base and / or stop switch 42A of the reel 31A is white, the color of the base and / or stop switch 42B of the reel 31B is blue, the color of the base and / or stop switch 42C of the reel 31C is yellow. The base color of the reel 31D and / or the color of the stop switch 42D is red (they are different colors). Then, in the above example, instead of the notification of "3412", the notification of "yellow, red, white, and blue" may be performed (at least one of the image display, the voice display, and the lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, among the stop switches 42 to be operated from the first to the fourth, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated at the fourth (last) is darkened (or concealed). Can be mentioned. In this case, "brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first> brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second ≥ corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third. Image brightness ≧ Image brightness corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth ”.
Then, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the image corresponding to the fourth stop switch 42 is to be operated. It is possible to make the brightness of the image to be operated the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when the pressing order of "3412" is notified as an image as in the above example, the image is first displayed as "3 ● 12". Note that "●" is an image corresponding to the "4" th pressing order, and the character "4" may be darkened (hidden) so that it cannot be seen at all, or "4". The characters may be dim enough to be identified.

When the image is displayed as "3 ● 12", the image is displayed in the same manner as in the case of 6 selections, so that the player can intuitively understand the pressing order. Then, when the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following 1) to 3) may be executed.
1) Change the "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to the display of "●", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34 ● 2".
2) Change the "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to a display such as "-" or "○", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34 ○ 2".
3) Change "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34 * 2"("*" means a blank).

Further, even after the second stop, the images may be displayed as "34 ●●", "34 ---", "34 ○○", and "34 **" in the same manner as described above.
Further, after the third stop, images such as "● 4 ●●", "-4--", "○ 4 ○○", and "* 4 **" can be displayed.
Alternatively, after the third stop, the image itself in the push order may be erased.
Even when all the pressing orders are displayed as "4312" as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. Is deleted as in 1) to 3) above, because the operated stop switch 42 becomes easy to understand, which is preferable. Specifically, after displaying the image as "4312", "43 ● 2" (after operating the stop switch 42C) → "43 ●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D) → "4 ●●●" (stop switch 42B) After the operation), the image is displayed (“●” may be “○”, “-”, or “*” as described above).

Furthermore, as a fourth method, the push order is notified by using a four-character compound word. For example, when "spring, summer, autumn, and winter" is used as one of the four-character idioms to notify the pressing order, the correct pressing order is "spring->summer->autumn->winter".
Then, when the pressing order is "3412" as described above, the notification (image display, voice display) of "autumn / winter / spring / summer" may be performed as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, the image is displayed as "autumn ● spring / summer" before the first stop, and the image is displayed as “autumn / winter ● summer” after the first stop.
In any of the first to fourth methods, if a push order error occurs in the middle, the image of the push order may be displayed as it is, or when the push order error occurs. The image may be erased.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the 24-choice push order bell is provided as described above, 24 types of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the push order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", "FF", Twenty-four types can be provided.

Although the 11th to 13th embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the lottery of the advantageous section was performed only when the winning combination lottery result became the target lottery result. As described above, when the winning combination lottery result is not won (when the condition device does not operate as a result of the internal lottery), the advantageous section transition lottery, which is the process related to the advantageous section, is set in this way. This is because it was considered preferable not to do so. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set in this way, and the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process is executed after the advantageous section transition lottery. Here, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined in the advantageous section is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition process (FIG. 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery. You may. Similarly, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined by the AT is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the AT set processing (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed without executing the AT lottery. May be executed.
Furthermore, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be an advantageous section and AT is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition processing and the advantageous section transition processing are performed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery or the AT lottery processing. AT set processing may be executed.
In addition, when a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous section transition lottery is provided, the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed even when the winning combination lottery result is obtained. In this case, the number of winnings in the advantageous section may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of games of the AT is determined, the number of games is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management type AT, and may be a difference number management type AT. In the case of the difference number management type AT, when the AT is won, the initial value of the difference number that can be acquired is determined and stored in the AT difference number counter (different from the difference counter). Then, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter every time there is a payout, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", AT is terminated.
Even in the case of such a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is subtracted when the number is one specified number (for example, "3"), but when the number is another specified number (for example, "2"), the AT is subtracted. Do not subtract the difference number counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting can be changed after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the power is turned off and the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off before the setting can be changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section is displayed before the state where the setting can be changed is terminated (after the setting is changed to “Yes” in step S242 in FIG. 39) and before the main processing is started (before step S248). The LED flag clearing (initialization) process may be executed. In this way, it is possible to control so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one difference counter were provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and two difference counters (important counters) may be provided to check the consistency.
For example, as the advantageous section clear counter, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided. During the advantageous section, both the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are updated each time the game is exhausted. Further, for example, in the determination in step S424 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", whether or not the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0", or whether the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are cleared. Determine if the counter has the same value. When it is determined that the values are "0" or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
As the difference counter, a first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided. Then, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated for each game digestion. Further, for example, in the determination in step S434 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first difference counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit, or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. To judge. When it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded or the values are the same, the process proceeds to step S435.

If the advantageous section clear counter value and / or the difference counter value is determined as described above, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (invalid value) due to the influence of noise or the like, the advantageous section clear counter value Can be more accurately determined whether or not is "0" and / or whether or not the difference counter value exceeds the upper limit value.
If the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and the second difference counter do not match, for example, an error is displayed and the game progresses. (Main processing) may be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed in step S544, the process proceeds to step S545, and it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the BB game may output a special effect different from the normal BB game. It is possible to suggest to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared by the special effect during the BB game.

Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter is not determined, and in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is, for example, "2000 (D)" (an example of the threshold value, and this value). It may be determined whether or not the value exceeds (). Then, when it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter is cleared, and a special effect (an effect suggesting that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. It may be output.

Furthermore, in the above case, when the power is cut off in the game in which the sub-difference number counter during the BB game exceeds "2000 (D)" (the special effect has not been output yet), the power is restored from the power off. The special effect may be output from the game. In this case, when returning from the power off, it is sufficient to read the sub-difference number counter value and the fact that the BB game is in progress, and determine whether or not to output the special effect.

Further, if a power failure occurs during rotation of the reel 31 of the game in which the sub-difference number counter during the BB game exceeds "2000 (D)", the special effect may be output from the game recovered from the power failure. Good. Therefore, in this case, if the power is not cut off, the special effect is output from the next game, but if the power is cut off while the reel 31 is rotating, the special effect is output from that game. Become.

(7) The game is played with the specified number "2" during AT (the instruction function does not operate when the specified number is "2"), the push order bell is won, and the stop switch 42 is accidentally operated in the correct push order. , There is a small winning combination, and when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", at the end of the game, it is possible to output an effect notifying the end of AT, such as displaying an image such as "END". preferable. This is to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct answer pressing order is not notified, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

(8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct push order is not notified, for example, when the game is played with the specified number "2", the push order bell is won. , Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, the payout number of the game is set to "2" or less (the difference number of the games is "0" or less) so that the AT does not end in the game. You may.

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub-difference number counter continued counting even during the BB game. However, not limited to this, when the BB is won during the AT and the game shifts to the BB game, the sub difference number counter may not be updated (the update of the sub difference number counter may be interrupted during the BB game). ..
In this case, for example, in FIG. 56, before step S531, it is determined whether or not the BB is operating (determined by the operating state flag). Then, when the BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Further, when the sub-difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processes of steps S551 and S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 become unnecessary. Then, when the result is "No" in step S547, the process proceeds to step S552.

B. 12th Embodiment (1) Similar to the 11th embodiment, in FIG. 58, when the winning combination is not won, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is not executed. As mentioned above, the rules are taken into consideration. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into consideration, the transition lottery of the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is performed by only one specified number (in the example of FIG. 58, the specified number “3”) in one gaming state (RT). I tried to do it. This is done in consideration of the fact that, according to the rules, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is defined as only one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, a plurality of predetermined number of advantageous section transition lottery may be executed in one gaming state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is specified for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to specify the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, the game is played inside the BB2, and it is irregular that the BB2 wins a prize and shifts to the BB2 game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specification may be made in which the BB2 is awarded and the BB2 game is executed when the end condition of the AT is satisfied after the AT is executed inside the BB2. In this case, when the end condition of AT is satisfied inside BB2, after the end of the game satisfying the end condition of AT (after all reels 31 are stopped and the payout process is executed at the time of winning a small winning combination). Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before betting becomes possible), the specified number "2" is instructed to encourage BB2 to win a prize. In the twelfth embodiment, since the BB2 is won with the specified number "2", the specified number for winning the BB2 is "2", but for example, when the specified number "1" is used to win the BB. In, when the BB is awarded, the specified number "1" is instructed.
Further, the BB game having such specifications may be a BB game in which medals increase, or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When instructing the specified number, it was executed in the game start set process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the specified number of the next game is instructed at the time of the game end check process. However, when a small winning combination is won in the final game of the BB2 game and there is a payout, and the number of payouts is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the specified number is instructed after the number of payouts is displayed. If the LED that indicates the specified number is a dedicated LED, the specified number of the next game can be instructed to the dedicated LED while the number of payouts is being displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, in the case of executing a freeze in the final game of the BB2 game, when instructing the specified number of the next game at the end of the game, any timing before executing the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze. It may be.

(5) The function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed when the game can be executed by any of a plurality of specified numbers as in the twelfth embodiment. For example, in a game in an advantageous section, in a situation where it is advantageous to play a game with a specified number "3" (for example, in the case of being inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is dedicated to 3 bets. It may be set to a button. That is, when the number of credits is "3" and it is advantageous to play the game in the advantageous section and with the specified number "3", when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "3" is set to bet. To do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2" and it is advantageous to play the game in the advantageous section and with the specified number "3", even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" is not bet. To set.

Alternatively, even in a situation where the game can be played with the specified number "3", when the number of credits is "2", the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b is set so that "2" is bet. May be good. In particular, in FIG. 58, in non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set so that when the number of credits is "2", the 3-bet switch 40b is operated to bet "2".

(6) When most of the game sections are set as advantageous sections as in the twelfth embodiment, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from the difference counter) that can count the minus of the difference number is provided, and the payout rate for a predetermined period is calculated. When the ball ejection rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit value (the predetermined lower limit value is set higher than the lower limit value in the rule, for example), the instruction function is activated to increase the ball ejection rate. May be good. Then, when the ball output rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the instruction function is terminated.
It may or may not be included in the "AT" that the instruction function is activated when the predetermined lower limit value is reached. However, since the instruction function is still activated, it corresponds to the process related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the LED for displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is the acquired number display LED 78. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other existing LEDs may be set, or a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions may be separately provided.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is separately provided, the specified number of instructions is displayed even if the start switch 41 is operated after displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions in the game start set process. It is not necessary to delete the information corresponding to. Further, even if all reels 31 are stopped, a small winning combination is won, and medals are paid out, it is not necessary to delete the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions.
In addition, when a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is provided, the specified number of instructions is not confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc., so specify the specified number in any display mode. Can be done. For example, if the specified number of instructions is "2", it can be displayed as "2".

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example of instructing the specified number "2" is given, but depending on the specifications of the game machine, the specified number "1" or the specified number "3" may be instructed. Conceivable. If the specifications have the possibility of instructing any of the specified numbers "1" to "3", the display of the acquired number display LED78 when instructing the specified number "1" is set to "A1" and the specified number. For example, the display indicating "2" is set to "A2", and the display indicating the specified number "3" is set to "A3".

C. 13th Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 is set to pass through the center of the four reels 31 and pass through the center of the four stop switches 42. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire four stop switches 42 may be arranged to the right of the position shown in FIG. 58 so that, for example, a part of the stop switches 42B intersects the line L1. On the contrary, the entire four stop switches 42 may be arranged to the left of the position shown in FIG. 58 so that, for example, a part of the stop switches 42C intersects the line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, the Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but the Roman numeral portion may be used as a lamp. In this case, for example, when the stop switch to be operated next is 42C, the lamp of the Roman numeral "3" may be turned on.
In addition, different colors may be added to the range of Roman numerals from "1" to "4", and the stop switches 42A to 42D may also be colored according to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". Can be mentioned. In the above example, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of the Roman numeral "1" is white, the range of the Roman numeral "2" is blue, the range of the Roman numeral "3" is yellow, and the range of the Roman numeral "4" is red. Be done.

(3) Further, the portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be configured by the image display device 23. Then, as described above, each stop switch 42 is colored differently. In this case, for example, when the stop switch 42B (blue) is specified at the time of notifying the push order, the periphery of the reel 31B may be made to emit blue light.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the distance W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the distance W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 push orders can be provided as the push order bell. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to provide a first stop push order bell. Here, in the prior art, the first stop push order bell has three choices. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to set four options. When the correct answer pressing order is displayed as an image when the first stop pressing order bell is won, for example, if the correct answer stop switch 42 is the stop switch 42C, the image is displayed as "XX1x".

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and a second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set to the stop switch 42C, the second stop is set to the stop switch 42A, and the third stop and the fourth stop are arbitrary (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D is possible). In this case, the correct answer pressing order can be set to 12 choices. Further, when displaying the correct answer pressing order as an image, in the above example, the image may be displayed as "2 × 1 ×". Then, after the operation of the stop switch 42C, an image such as "2XX" may be displayed.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification are not limited to being carried out alone, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Additional notes>
Examples of the inventions (initial inventions) described in the initial specification of the present application include the following initial inventions 1 to 14, in order to solve the problems to be solved by the initial invention and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. The means and the effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification does not mean that the invention is limited to the initial inventions 1 to 14.

1. 1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a game machine in which processing related to a game medium is not executed after a power failure occurs.
In a conventional game machine, by turning off the blocker before executing the backup process as the power off process, even if a medal is inserted during the execution of the backup process, the medal is returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, a technique is known in which the medal addition process is not performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power off processing is executed, and the medal will be counted. There was a possibility. It is not preferable from the control point of view to execute the medal addition process (medal bet process or medal credit process) after the power is cut off.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the addition process of the game medium from being executed even when the power is cut off at approximately the same time as when the game medium is input from the game medium input port. ..

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (first embodiment (A)) is
Game medium slot (medal slot 47) and
It is provided in the passage (medal passage) of the game medium (medal) inserted from the game medium insertion port, and is in a state of permitting the passage of the game medium (on state) or a state of disallowing the passage of the game medium (off state). ) With a controllable blocker (45),
Detection means A (input sensor 44a) and B (input sensor 44b) provided in the passage of the game medium input from the game medium input port and capable of detecting the game medium (detection means B is on the downstream side of the detection means A). Located in) and equipped with
When an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off while the blocker is being controlled in a state where the passage of the game medium is permitted, the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected to detect the event of the game medium. The time until the blocker is controlled so as to disallow passage is set to T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3).
When the game medium is released from the game medium slot toward the inside of the game machine in a situation where the blocker is controlled in a state where the passage of the game medium is permitted, the game medium is not visible from the front of the game machine. From the time when it becomes possible (position of M2 in FIG. 2) until the detection means B detects the game medium and the detection means B does not detect the game medium (position of M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3)
T1 <T2
It is characterized by making it become.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, when the game medium is released from the game medium slot toward the inside of the game machine and the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine, a power failure occurs. In that case, the blocker is controlled so as to detect an event in which the power supply is cut off and disallow the passage of the game medium by the time the detection means B does not detect the game medium. At least, it is not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the addition process (bet process or credit process) of the game medium is not executed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine, that is, even if the power is cut off immediately after the game medium is released inside the game machine, the game is played. It is possible to prevent the medium from being accepted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the addition process of the game medium from being executed after the power failure occurs.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 2 The initial invention relates to a gate mark of a substrate case in a gaming machine including a substrate case containing a control substrate inside.
In a conventional game machine, a board case in which a main control board is housed is known. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, a gate mark remains on the substrate case. Then, a technique using this gate mark as a mark has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, the gate mark of the substrate case is not clear when viewed from the outside because it has a cut portion of the resin. Therefore, there is a problem that the gate mark may be opened and the inside of the main control board may be accessed.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to suppress the goto action using the gate mark of the substrate case.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (second embodiment) is
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) equipped with a calculation function and
A control board (main control board 50) on which the predetermined IC is mounted on one surface (a surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57).
It has a plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surface, etc.), and includes a substrate case (a substrate case 56 including an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) for accommodating the control substrate.
The inside of the substrate case is visibly formed.
A gate mark (57b) at the time of molding of the substrate case is arranged on a surface (outside the upper surface of the upper cover 57) that is outside the substrate case and faces the one surface of the control substrate.
It is characterized in that the predetermined IC of the control board is not positioned in the direction perpendicular to the surface facing the gate trace.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the original invention, since the predetermined IC of the control board is not located in the vertical direction of the gate trace of the substrate case, the gate trace is illegally opened to access the predetermined IC. Can be prevented.
Further, since the gate mark of the substrate case does not exist in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being obstructed by the gate mark. As a result, it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not fraud has been performed on the predetermined IC.

3. 3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 The initial invention relates to a process when communication is restored from a disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub control board.
In a conventional game machine, a game machine is known in which a command is transmitted from a main control board to a sub control board, and the sub control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command.
Here, the sub-control board is known to have a technique of comparing the command received last time with the command received this time and determining that the command reception is abnormal based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, special feature). Open 2014-226503).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board, a disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when the communication is restored, the sub control board may not be able to output a normal effect.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make the effect when communication is restored after the disconnection between the main control board and the sub control board occurs.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment) is
Main control board (50) and
A sub-control board (80) that controls the effect based on the information received from the main control board is provided.
The sub control board makes it possible to receive information on the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board.
In a predetermined gaming state (AT), the sub-control board can output an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on the information of the operated stop switch.
The sub-control board
When the predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined game state and the information that the predetermined stop switch is operated is received, the predetermined stop switch corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. The effect (the effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch is stopped) is output, and then the information from the main control board becomes unreceivable before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated. After that, the information from the main control board can be received in the "N + a" game, and then, in the "N + a" game, the information that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch is operated is received. When, an effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and related to the predetermined effect (an effect following the predetermined effect and an effect when the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch is stopped) is output. Then, when the predetermined information is received in the "N + a + 1" game, the effect of the "N + a + 1" game is output based on the predetermined information.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, when communication is restored in the middle of the "N + a" game, an effect related to the predetermined effect of the "N" game that has been output up to that point is output. Therefore, in the "N + a" game, the effect following the "N" game can be output. Then, since the normal effect is restored when the game shifts to the "N + a + 1" game, it is possible to prevent the effect from suddenly changing due to the return of communication in the middle of the "N + a" game. As a result, it is possible to output a natural effect before and after the occurrence of disconnection.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a game machine capable of operating a stop switch at high speed.
In a conventional game machine, when a stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. Further, after the reel is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor is excited for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or the motor is in the exciting state, the operation of the next stop switch is not accepted.
Here, there is known a technique in which the stop operation is not accepted even if the second stop switch is operated from the operation of the first stop switch to the stop state of the reel status (). For example, see JP-A-2017-093576).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, there is a problem that the game cannot be digested at high speed if it takes a long time after the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch operation can be accepted.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment) is
Reel (31) and
A motor (32) for rotating the reel and
Based on the detection of the operation of the stop button (stop button 42a), the reel control means (65) that drives and controls the motor to stop the rotation of the reel, and
Equipped with an internal lottery means (role lottery means 61)
The sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest part (position shown in FIG. 12C), and when the push of the stop button is released, the stop is stopped. The button is configured to be movable to the initial position (position shown in FIG. 12A) by urging force, and the sensor is turned off before the stop button is moved to the initial position.
In a game in which the internal lottery means determines a predetermined result, the stop button is operated on a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under a situation where all the reels are rotated by the reel control means, and the predetermined reel is operated. After detecting the on of the sensor of the stop button with respect to the reel, an excitation state (4-phase excitation state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) has elapsed since the excitation state was set. When it is, it is configured to end the excitation state.
When the time from the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released until the sensor is turned off is T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) and the predetermined time is T2.
T1 <T2
It is characterized by making it become.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is assumed that the start of the excited state of the motor when the reel is stopped and the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released at the same time. Occasionally, the excited state ends after the sensor is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button at the timing when the excited state of the motor is completed.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 The initial invention relates to the control of the medal payout device.
It is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal in a conventional game machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as a hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk, but when a constant current is passed through the DC motor, the drive shaft gradually accelerates from the stopped rotation state. After that, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates from the start of driving of the hopper motor to the ejection of the first medal, and therefore from the start of driving of the hopper motor to the ejection of the first medal. The time required is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, which may give the player the feeling that the ejection of the first medal is delayed.
The problem that the invention initially seeks to solve is to prevent the player from feeling that the first medal has been ejected late.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
A hopper (35) that stores medals and
A hopper disk (101) provided on the hopper and
A hopper motor (36) that rotates the hopper disk and
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor is provided.
The hopper disk is provided with a plurality (8) holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper along the outer circumference of the hopper disk.
When the hopper motor is driven to rotate the hopper disk, the medals held in the holding portion are formed so as to be sequentially ejected from the discharging portion (103).
The position of the holding portion where the last ejected medal was held at the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process is ejected from the ejected portion is set as the first position.
The position of the holding portion where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejected portion is set as the second position.
When the control means finishes the one payout process, the holding portion holding the first ejection medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. It is characterized in that the drive of the hopper motor is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the original invention, when the holding portion holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, it reaches the first position. The distance is shorter than when stopped at the second position. As a result, the time to reach the first position is also shorter than when stopped at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates, the ejection of the first medal is delayed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the feeling.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to an arrangement of a main control board mounted inside a cabinet and a sub control board mounted on the back surface of a front door.
It is known that a conventional gaming machine is provided with an electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity on a sub-control board for controlling an effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity is filled with an electrolytic solution, but when the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a defect and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, There is a possibility that the main CPU will malfunction. In addition, there is a possibility that the main CPU will be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor bursts.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is scattered. Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a defect, the main CPU is not damaged by the impact at that time.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (7th embodiment) is
Cabinet (13) and
A front door (12) that is openably attached to the cabinet and
The main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub control board (80) that controls the production,
The main control board is mounted inside the cabinet.
The sub control board is attached to the back surface of the front door.
The main control board and the sub control board are arranged so as to face each other with the front door closed.
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board.
The sub-control board is characterized in that the electrolytic capacitor (86) is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub control board, the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is used. It is possible to prevent the scattered electrolytic solution from adhering to the main CPU even if the particles are scattered, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor bursts, the impact can be prevented from being directly received by the main CPU, whereby the main CPU can be prevented from being damaged.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to reel stop control on the main control board side and control of the output of the effect on the sub control board side.
In a conventional game machine, it is possible to execute multiple types of production contents, and each production content is divided into when a special role is won (internal) and when a special role is not won (non-internal). Are known to have different selection probabilities (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146608).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the production content is selected regardless of the lottery result of the internal lottery in both the inside and the non-inside.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the lottery result of the internal lottery.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (9th embodiment) is
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols and
A plurality of stop switches (42) operated by the player when stopping each of the reels,
The main control means (main control board 50) that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the production,
The main control means
An internal lottery that draws so that there is a case where the first lottery result (for example, "BB" alone is won inside the BB) or a case where the second lottery result (for example, "non-winning" inside the BB) is obtained. Means (role lottery means 61) and
A plurality of stop position determination tables that determine the stop positions of the reels corresponding to the positions of the reels at the moment when the stop switch is operated.
A reel control means (65) for determining a stop position of the reel using any of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position is provided.
The reel control means determines the stop position of the reel by using the same stop position determination table in the game that resulted in the first lottery and the game that resulted in the second lottery.
The sub control means
Multiple production decision tables that determine the production to be output,
It is provided with an effect output control means (91) that determines the effect to be output using any of the above-mentioned effect determination tables and outputs the determined effect.
The effect output control means is characterized in that the effect to be output is determined by using different effect determination tables for the game that is the result of the first lottery and the game that is the result of the second lottery.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, the reel control means is stopped at the same stop on the main control means side in the game in which the first lottery result is obtained by the internal lottery means and the game in which the second lottery result is obtained. The position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel, but on the sub-control means side, the effect output control means determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table.
As a result, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and the effects can be diversified.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a gap between a cabinet and a front door.
In a conventional game machine, a protruding side protruding outward is provided at the edge of an opening on the front side of the cabinet so that the protruding side is accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. As a result, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign matter to enter (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable to open the front door a little so that the protruding side is separated from the front door so that foreign matter can enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to open the front door a little to prevent fraudulent acts (goto acts) in which foreign matter is invaded through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
Cabinet (13) and
A front door (12) that is openably attached to the cabinet and
It is equipped with a door sensor that detects the opening of the front door.
At the lower part of the cabinet, a first closing portion (13c) that protrudes toward the front door when the front door is closed is provided.
A second closing portion (12a) that protrudes toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position below the first closing portion in the lower part of the front door.
A third closed portion (12b) that protrudes toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position above the first closed portion in the lower part of the front door.
When the front door is closed, the first closed portion is formed so as to be arranged between the second closed portion and the third closed portion.
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door is set as the detection start position.
Even when the front door is in the detection start position, the first closed portion is formed so as to be arranged between the second closed portion and the third closed portion.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closed portion and the third closed portion are formed. The first obstruction will come out from between. Further, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it is possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open, the first closed portion does not come out from between the second closed portion and the third closed portion, and the front door is notified that the front door is open. Even at a possible position, the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a bent shape, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (goto acts) in which foreign matter enters through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section indicator.
Conventionally, a game machine provided with an advantageous section indicator has been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator, the lighting control of the advantageous section indicator at the time of recovery from a power failure has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator when returning from a power failure.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42), and
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed, and
It is equipped with an advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED77) that indicates that it is an advantageous section.
When the power supply is cut off while the advantageous section indicator is lit and the power supply is restarted with the setting change switch turned off, the advantageous section indicator is turned on after the interrupt processing is started. It is possible to execute the process for lighting,
A process for turning off the advantageous section indicator when the power supply is restarted while the setting change switch is on after the power supply is cut off while the advantageous section indicator is lit. The feature is that it is possible to shift to the setting change process after executing.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section indicator can be appropriately controlled according to the situation when the power is turned off and then restored.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with four reels and a stop button.
Conventional game machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to increase the number of reels and stop buttons to four in conventional game machines. However, if the number of stop buttons is set to 4, there is a problem that an operation error of the stop button is likely to occur at AT.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it difficult for an operation error of the stop button to occur when the number of stop buttons is set to four.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
4 reels (31A-31D) and
It is equipped with four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels.
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons.
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is positioned vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button.
It is characterized in that at least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, even when the number of stop buttons is 4, the left and right ends of the operation buttons can be used as markers to operate the left and right ends of the stop buttons. , It is possible to prevent the operation error of the stop button from occurring.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of instructing a specified number.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of playing with a specified number of any one of a plurality of specified numbers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional game machine, even if a game can be played with a specified number of any one of a plurality of types of specified numbers, an appropriate specified number and an inappropriate specified number may occur.
The problem that the invention initially tries to solve is to make it possible to play games in an appropriate specified number.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) is provided.
When the operation mode is notified in the notification game state, the information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquired number display LED78).
In the notified game state, the game can be started when a specified number of game values out of at least a plurality of specified numbers (“2” or “3”) is input.
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit.
In the notification game state, when displaying the information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display unit, a predetermined timing (in FIG. 42) from the time when all the reels are stopped until the start switch is detected to be turned on. , Displayed in step S322),
When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display unit, it is displayed in a display mode that can be distinguished from the information corresponding to the operation mode (when the specified number is "2", it is displayed as "0A"). It is a feature.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on, so that the appropriate timing for the player. Therefore, an appropriate specified number in the game can be notified.
In addition, the player can prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode with the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. Initial invention 12
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 12 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number of sheets in the notified gaming state.
Conventionally, a game machine including a counter for counting the difference number of sheets in AT has been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
In the conventional game machine, it is required to initialize the information about the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. However, there are cases where the next AT is won early after the end of the AT, and there are cases where it is desired to take over the difference in the number of the previous AT.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to take over the difference number of the previous notification game state (AT) while initializing the information about the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42), and
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed, and
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference indicating the difference between the number of bets on the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies hereinafter), and the minimum value is "0". The first difference counter (difference counter) that stores the value set to
The second control means (sub-control board 80) is provided with a second difference counter (sub-difference number counter) that stores the cumulative value of the difference indicating the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of the game value.
At the end of the advantageous section, the first difference counter is cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the second difference counter is not cleared.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, since the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section, the rule of initializing the information regarding the advantageous section can be observed. In addition, the second difference counter may not be cleared, in which case it is possible to take over the difference number of the previous notified game state at the start of the next notified game state.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 13 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number in the notified gaming state.
Conventionally, a game machine including a counter for counting the difference number of sheets in AT has been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in the conventional game machine, how to count (update) the difference number at the time of winning the replay has not been sufficiently examined.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately execute the update process of the difference number at the time of winning the replay.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) and
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed, and
A difference counter that stores the cumulative value of the difference indicating the difference between the number of bets on the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits. The same shall apply hereinafter) with the minimum value set to "0".
It is equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section.
1. 1. At least in the game in which the small winning combination is won, after all the reels are stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ( 51 or 52, step S424),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is set without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). The process for terminating (step S435) can be executed,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section (when "No" in step S424), the update process of the difference counter (steps S428 and W429) is executed. Later, when it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (step S434) and it is determined that the value satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (Yes in step S434). ”), The process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.
2. In the game in which the replay is won, after all the reels are stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (FIG. 51). Or in FIG. 52, step S424),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (when "Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference counter is not determined (in step S434). The process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section (without executing the process) can be executed.
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section (when "No" in step S424), the difference counter is not executed without updating the difference counter. Is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or 52, if “Yes” in step S426, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. When it is determined that the above is true (when “Yes” in step S434), the process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, in the game won by the replay, the difference counter update process is performed regardless of whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section. Is not executed, so that the update process of the difference number in the game won in the replay can be appropriately executed. Further, the program processing can be speeded up.

14. Initial invention 14
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a game machine capable of executing processing related to an instruction function in a predetermined predetermined number.
Conventionally, game machines having an instruction function have been known (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in the conventional game machine, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently examined.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately execute the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section according to the specified number.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of executing an instruction function for notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42), and
An advantageous section where the notification game state can be executed, and
An advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to an advantageous section, and
It is equipped with a notification game counter (AT game number counter and AT difference number counter) for counting specific variables related to the notification game state (for example, the number of games and the difference number).
It has a game in which at least the first specified number (specified number "3") or the second specified number (specified number "2") can be input.
In the game (AT) in the advantageous section, in the game started based on the input of the first specified number, it is possible to execute the process related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct answer pressing order) (in FIG. 48). , "Yes" in step S382), and in the game started based on the input of the second specified number, the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the notified game state, in the game started based on the input of the first specified number, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the notified game The counter can be updated (step S333 in FIG. 43).
In the game started based on the input of the second specified number in the notified game state, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the notified game counter Make the update infeasible (“No” in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section can be optimized by making it possible to update the advantageous section counter in either the first specified number or the second specified number of games. ..
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed, it is possible to ensure consistency between the execution of the processing related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter. it can.

10 slot machine (game machine)
11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a 2nd obstruction 12b 3rd obstruction 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c 1st obstruction 14 Design display device 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout device 21 Direction lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop Button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal insertion port 47a Medal guard part 47b Medal holder 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a screw hole 51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 Board case (main board case)
57 Top cover 57a Caulking part 57b Gate mark 57c Indentation part 57d Protrusion 57e Protrusion part 58 Lower cover 58a Caulking part 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Set value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1-bet display LED
79b 2-bet display LED
79c 3-bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e input display LED
79f replay display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 sub CPU
86 Electrolytic capacitor 87 Sub-board case 91 Directing output control means 101 Hopper disk 102 Holding part 103 Discharge part 110 Reel base 120 Reel control board 121 Reel board case

Claims (1)

In the game in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the predetermined symbol combination can be stopped.
The predetermined game period, a first game condition, and a second game state capable of executing the predetermined effect when determining the predetermined result which does not execute the predetermined effect when determining the predetermined result, Can be set,
If a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, then the second gaming state can be set.
Wherein a predetermined game period, and the second a gaming state, when in the first predetermined number of executing the game by the first predetermined number in the execution possible situations a game in the second predetermined number, the predetermined game The first information about the end condition of the section can be updated,
Wherein a predetermined game period, and a second game state, when the even first prescribed number executes the game in the first prescribed number in viable situations a game in the second predetermined number, said first 2 The second information regarding the end condition of the game state can be updated.
Wherein a predetermined game period, and a second game state, when also executes the game in the second predetermined number in the execution possible situations a game in the second prescribed number in the first prescribed number, the predetermined The first information regarding the end condition of the game section of
Wherein a predetermined game period, and a second game state, when the even first prescribed number executes the game with the second predetermined number in viable situations a game in the second predetermined number, said first 2 A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to update the second information regarding the ending condition of the gaming state.